Home

TRIGger:A:BUS:B

1. Command Description ALlas Sets or returns the alias state ALlas CATalog Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels ALlas DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label ALlas DELEte Removes a specified alias ALlas DELEte ALL Deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe Removes a specified alias ALlas STATE Sets or returns the alias state DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Bus Command Group Command Groups Use the Bus commands when working with serial bus measurements Install the DPO3EMBD application module when working with I C or SPI bus signals Install the DPO3AUTO module when working with CAN or LIN bus signals Install the DPO3COMP module when working with RS232 bus signals Table 2 15 Bus Commands Commands Description BUS Returns the parameters for each bus BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Sets or returns the probing method used to probe the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in to sample during each bit period BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Sets or returns the CAN data source BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt Sets the display format for the numerical information in the specified bus waveform BUS B lt x gt DISplay TY Pe Sets the display type for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude Sets and returns whether the read
2. Argument Description ACQuire Acquire button AUTOset Autoset button BMENU lt x gt Screen bottom menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the left most bottom menu button and lt x gt 7 for the right most bottom menu button B lt x gt Bus select buttons where lt x gt 1 2 CH lt x gt Channel select button where lt x gt 1 for channel 1 lt x gt 2 for channel 2 and so on CURsor Cursors button DEFaultsetup Default Setup button FINe Fine button FORCetrig Force Trig button HARDcopy Hardcopy button INTensity Intensity button MAGnify Magnify zoom button not the zoom pan knob MARk Mark Set Clear button MATh M button MENUOff Menu Off button MEASurement Measure button NEXt Next arrow button PAUse Play pause button DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 143 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples Table 2 36 FPAnel PRESS arguments cont Argument Description PREv Previous arrow button REF R button RMENU lt x gt Screen side menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the top most side menu button and lt x gt 5 for the bottom most side menu button RUnstop Run Stop button SAVEBUtton Save button SAVERecall Save Recall Menu button SEArch Search button SELect Select button SINGleseq Single button TESt Test button TRIGger Trigger Menu button UTILity Utility button FPANEL PRESS AUTOSET executes the oscilloscope Autoset function FPAnel TURN No
3. Command Description ACQuire Returns acquisition parameters ACQuire MAXSamplerate Returns the maximum real time sample rate ACQuire MODe Sets or returns the acquisition mode ACQuire NUMACq Returns number of acquisitions that have occurred ACQuire NUMAVg Sets or returns the number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform ACQuire STATE Starts or stops the acquisition system ACQuire STOPAfter Sets or returns whether the acquisition is continuous or single sequence DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 11 Command Groups Alias Command Group 2 12 Use the Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies The alias mechanism obeys the following rules m The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE488 2 message unit which may not appear in a message preceded by a colon comma or a command or query program header The alias name may not appear in a message followed by a colon comma or question mark Analias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form m An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of the alias deletion functions m Alias names do not appear in response messages Table 2 14 Alias Commands
4. Bit Function 7 MSB Not used 6 RQS Request Service Obtained from a serial poll Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller 6 MSS Master Status Summary Obtained from STB query Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR 5 ESB Event Status Bit Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions cont Bit Function 4 MAV Message Available Shows that output is available in the Output Queue 3 _ Notused 2 _Notused 1 0 _ Notused Enable Registers DESER ESER and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero the event is not recorded Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described below The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER This register controls which types of events are reported to the
5. Code Message 0 No events to report queue empty 1 No events to report new events pending ESR The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper syntax Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 101 Invalid character DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 cont Code Message 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 109 Missing parameter 110 Command header error 112 Program mnemonic too long 113 Undefined header 120 Numeric data error 121 Invalid character in numeric 123 Exponent too large 124 Too many digits 130 Suffix error 131 Invalid suffix 134 Suffix too long 140 Character data error 141 Invalid character data 144 Character data too long 150 String data error 151 Invalid string data 152 String data too long 160 Block data error 161 Invalid block data 170 Command expression error 171 Invalid expression Execution Error The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a command Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 200 Execution error 221 Set
6. CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule MATHL VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Math 1 input signal 1 3 divisions higher than a position of 0 MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION might return MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000E 00 indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center graticule MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Group Syntax 2 168 Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type Math MATH 1 VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical SCAle DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt SCAle REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt is the scale per division in the current math vertical units The range is from 1 0E 12 through 500 0E 12 MATH1 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Math scale to 100 mV per division MATH VERTICAL SCALE might return MATH VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000E 00 indicating that the current scale setting of Math is 1 V per division MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value Group Math Syntax MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Examples MATH VERTICAL UNITS might return MATH VERTICAL UNITS joules indicating that the math vertical unit label for unknown values is joules MATHVAR Query Only Queries both numerical values you ca
7. Command Description CH lt x gt TERmination Sets or returns channel input termination CH lt x gt VOLts Sets or returns the vertical sensitivity for channel lt x gt CH lt x gt YUNits Sets or returns the units for the specified channel to a custom string REF lt x gt Returns reference waveform data for channel lt X gt REF lt x gt DATE Returns the date that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal position of the specified reference waveform in percent of the waveform that is displayed to the right of the center vertical graticule REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale for a reference waveform REF lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the specified reference waveform label REF lt x gt TIMe Returns the time that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertical position of the specified reference waveform REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the reference waveform vertical scale in vertical units div SELect Returns information on which waveforms are on or off and which waveform is selected SELect BUS lt x gt Turns on or off the specified bus waveform or returns whether the specified bus channel is on or off SELect CH lt x gt Turns on or off the specified waveform or returns whether the specified channel is on or off SELect CONT
8. PASS indicates the signal path calibration completed successfully FAIL indicates the signal path calibration did not complete successfully RUNNING indicates the signal path calibration is currently running CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS might return CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS INIT indicating that the current status of the internal signal path calibration is that it has not been run CALibrate RESults Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns the status of internal and factory calibrations without performing any calibration operations The results returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes The CALibrate RESults query is intended to support GO NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness all returned results should indicate PASS status if the oscilloscope is fit for duty It is quite common however to use uncalibrated probes particularly when the oscilloscope inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults CAL CALibrate RESults FACtory Query Only 2 86 Returns the status of internal and factory calibration without performing any calibration operations DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults FACtory CALibrate RESults SPC Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Example
9. TRIGger MODe NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 2 Ifconcatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the beginning colon For example you can concatenate the commands ACQuire MODe ENVelope and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 into a single command ACQuire MODe ENVelope NUMAVg 8 The longer version works equally well ACQuire MODe ENVelope ACQuire NUMAVg 8 3 Never precede a star command with a colon ACQuire STATE 1 OPC Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not there so the commands ACQUire MODe ENVelope OPC NUMAVg 8 will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging to 8 4 When you concatenate queries the responses to all the queries are concatenated into a single response message For example if the display graticule is set to Full and the display style is set to dotsonly the concatenated query DISplay GRAticule STYle DOTSonly will return the following If the header is on DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 1 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax If the header is off FULL 1 5 Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message For example ACQuire MODe SAMple NUMAVg STATE is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample The message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state Concaten
10. WFMOutpre PT_Off WFMOutpre PT_ORder This query always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed This query always returns LINEAR WFMOutpre WFld Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XINcr Returns the horizontal sampling interval for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XUNit Returns the horizontal units for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XZEro Returns the time of the first point in the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YMUIt Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YOFf Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the outgoing waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 32 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description WFMOutpre YUNit Returns the vertical units for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YZEro Returns the vertical offset for the outgoing waveform Zoom Command Group 2 52 Use the commands in the Zoom Command Group to expand and position the waveform display horizontally and vertically without changing the time base or vertical settings Table 2 33 Zoom Commands Command Description ZOOm Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display ZOOm MODe STATE Sets or returns the zoom mode ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt Returns the current vertical a
11. Argument Description GPKNOB1 Multipurpose a knob GPKNOB2 Multipurpose b knob HORZPos Horizontal Position knob HORZScale Horizontal Scale knob PANKNOB1 Outer pan knob TRIGLevel Trigger Level knob VERTPOS lt n gt Vertical Position knob VERTSCALE lt n gt Vertical Scale knob ZOOM Inner zoom knob FPANEL TURN TRIGLEVEL 10 duplicates turning the front panel Trigger Level knob clockwise by 10 units GPIBUsb ADDress Query Only Group Syntax Returns the current GPIB address setting for a connected TEK USB 488 adaptor module Miscellaneous GPIBUsSb ADDress GPIBUsb ID Query Only Group Syntax Returns the identification string of the connected TEK USB 488 adaptor module and firmware version If a TEK USB 488 2 module is not connected the system returns Not detected Miscellaneous GPIBUSb ID DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 145 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sends a hard copy of the screen display to the currently active printer using the current palette and layout settings Hard Copy HARDCopy START HARDCopy WAI CLS START sends a block of data representing the current screen image to the requested port The data sent is in the image format specified by SAVe MAGe FILEFormat and the compression level is controlled by whatever format has been selected BMP and TIFF are uncompressed
12. BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the number of RS232 data bits for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 7 8 9 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 7 specifies seven bits in the RS232 data frame 8 specifies eight bits in the RS232 data frame 8 specifies nine bits in the RS232 data frame BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232 delimiting value for a packet on bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter NUL1 LF CR SPace XFF BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter NUL1 specifies 0x00 LF specifies Ox0A CR specifies 0x0D XFF specifies OxFF BUS B lt x gt RS232C DiSplaymode Sets or returns the display mode for the bus lt x gt display and event table where x is the bus number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 75 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode FRAme PACKET BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode FRAme displays each frame as a single entity PACKET displays a group of frames terminated with a single frame defined by the BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELImiter c
13. Examples Returns all of the A logic trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A LOGICc TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGGER A LOGIC might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Group Syntax Related Commands 2 290 Sets or returns the class of the Logic Trigger This command is used in conjunction with the TRIGger A TYPe command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss LOGIC SETHold TRIGger A LOGIC CLASS TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A PULse CLAss DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on logical combinations of the channels When the TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce is NONE LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met on four channel oscilloscopes On two channel oscilloscopes only channel and channel 2 are available When the TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce is set to one of the channels LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of the remaining channel
14. Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN Search if search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data in bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the LIN data size is 8 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating that the LIN data size is 1 byte SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for a LIN search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 233 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt is the binary data string for the search SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is don t care SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger
15. POSITIVe places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is positive NEGative places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is negative SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source waveform for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth Source CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Group Sets or returns the condition for generating a pulse width search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 249 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn LeESSThan places a mark if the pulse width is less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command Than places a mark if the pulse width is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth comma
16. Creates a new folder Group File System Syntax FILESystem MKDir lt directory path gt Related Commands FILESystem C WD FILESystem DIR Arguments lt directory path gt is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create Examples FILESYSTEM MKDIR E NewDirectory creates the directory named NewDirectory at the root of the E drive These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the E drive FILESYSTEM CwD E MyDirectory FILESYSTEM MKDIR MyNewSubDi rectory 2 140 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This of course assumes that E MyDirectory already existed and was not a read only directory FILESystem READFile No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface If the specified file does not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted File System FILESystem READFile lt QString gt FILESystem C WD lt QString gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory specify only the file name FILESYSTEM READFILE E test_data tek00016CH1 csv reads the content of the specified file if the file exists and is readable and sends the content of the file to the current interface FILESystem REName No Query Form Group
17. DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DiSplay INTENSITy GRAticule Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets and returns the display graticule intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule lt NR1 gt is the graticule intensity and ranges from 0 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE 30 DiSplay INTENSITy WAVEform Group Syntax Arguments Examples DiSplay PERSistence Sets and returns the display waveform intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM might return DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 60 as the intensity of the waveforms Sets or returns the display persistence This affects the display only DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 127 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples NOTE When Persistence is set to Infinite it does not mean that the brightness of any pixel should never decrease The brightness of a pixel is proportionally dependent on the ratio between its intensity which does NOT decrease at Infinite Persistence and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen If a particular pixel get hit less often than others its brightness will decreas
18. DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 113 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa 2 114 Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples lt asc curve gt is the waveform data in ASCII format The format for ASCII data is lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt where each lt NR1 gt represents a data point CURVE with ASCII encoding start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively and a width set to 1 might return CURVE 61 62 61 60 60 59 59 58 58 59 NOTE Curve data is transferred from the oscilloscope asynchronously depending on the length of the curve record Such transfers may require several seconds to complete During this period the oscilloscope will not respond to the user controls You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a device clear message to the oscilloscope or by interrupting the query with another command or query In order to verify that curve data has been completely transferred it is recommended that you follow such queries with an ESR query to verify there are no error bits set You can also check the event queue to determine the cause of the error If the error was caused by an interrupted query then the asynchronous data transfer was not complete when the ESR query was sent In such cases it may be necessary to increase the program s time out value to ensure that all data is transferred and read Sets or returns the format and location of waveform data transferre
19. Math expressions can also be complex consisting of up to 128 characters and comprising many sources functions and operands The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons You can turn off the channel stop the waveform or stop the trigger When you turn off the channel math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed When you stop either the waveform or the trigger the math calculation stops and the last math calculation performed is displayed When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered math waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes Remember that sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math waveforms Table 2 24 Math Commands Command Description MATH 1 Returns the definition of the math waveform MATH 1 DEFine Sets or returns the current math function as a text string MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for Dual Math waveforms MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts Returns the math waveform horizontal unit value MATH MATH1 LABel Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Sets or returns the units of spectral magnification in the math string MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Sets or returns the window function for math waveform spectral input data MATH 1 VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertica
20. READ specifies a read condition WRITE specifies a write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 230 Conditions Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa VALue lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the se
21. SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode to standard or extended format Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for a LIN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 32 Command Description SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the 12C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt
22. See page 3 7 Synchronization Methods Table 2 39 Commands that Generate an OPC Message Operation Command Single sequence acquisition ACQuire STATE ON NR 1 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute DIAg STATE EXECute RECAII SETUp lt file path gt RECAII WAVEform lt file path gt REF lt x gt SAVe IMAGe lt file path gt SAVe SETUp lt file path gt SAVe WAVEform lt wim gt REF lt x gt TEKSecure Hard copy operation HARDCopy START Calibration step STARt PREVious CONTinue Status and Error OPC OPC BUSY WAI OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of all pending OPC operations DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OPC might return to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished PASSWord No Query Form PSC Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Group Syntax Enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands Sending PASS Word without any arguments disables these same commands Once the password is successfully entered the PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the oscilloscope is powered off or until the FACtory command or the PASS Word command with no arguments is issued To change the password you must first enter the valid password with the PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass command Remember that the password is cas
23. 0 sets the ink saver mode off HARDCOPY INKSAVER ON will cause subsequent hard copy output to display the screen on a white background Sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy If you set the layout to LANdscape the printer will print hard copies in landscape mode where the long edge of the screen will print to the long edge of the sheet of paper If you set the layout to PORTRait the printer will print hard copies in portrait mode Hard Copy HARDCopy LAYout PORTRait LANdscape HARDCopy LAYout PORTRait orients the screen image vertically on the printed page LANdscape orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page HARDCOPY LAYOUT LANDSCAPE sets the hard copy page orientation to Landscape HARDCOPY LAYOUT might return HARDCOPY LAYOUT PORTRAIT indicating that the hard copy page orientation is set to portrait DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 147 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy PREVIEW No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Displays a preview of the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied Hard Copy HARDCopy PREVIEW ON OFF lt NR1 gt ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode on OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode off HARDCopy PRINTer ADD No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Adds a network printer to the list of available printers All three arguments must be present but only one of server name or server IP addres
24. Arguments Examples lt NR1 gt 0 does not include the read write bit in the addess any other value includes the read write bit in the address OFF does not include the read write bit in the address ON includes the read write bit in the address BUS B1 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE ON includes the read write bit in the address BUS B1 I12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE might return BUS B1 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 indicating the read write bit is not included in the address BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt 1I12C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt 12C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the analog channel to use as the I2C SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 70 Sets or returns the I2C SDATA source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt 1I12C DATA SDATA SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt X gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the analog channel to use as the I2C SDATA source DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual BUS B lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate Group Syntax Ar
25. CRC CRCHeader CRCTrailer CREATE CRMS CROSSHair CURSor CURSors CURVe CURrent CUSTom CwD CYCLEcount D DATA DATABits DATE DATa DAI1 DB DC DEFine DEGAUSS DEGrees DELEte DELIMiter DELTa DELTatime DELay DELayed DELete DELta DESE DESKew DESTination DHCPbootp DIAg DIFFerential DIGtal DIR DIRection DISplay DISplaymode DNS DOMAINname DOTsonly DUAL DUmp DYNAM C ECL EDGE EDGe EEPROM EITher ENCdg END ENET ENGLish ENV ENVe lope EOF EOFTYPE EQUal EQual ERROR B 1 Appendix B Reserved Words ERRTYPE ERRlog ERRor ETHERnet EVEN EVENT EVENTS EVENTtable EVMsg Evaty EXECute EXT ExXTended ExTernal FACtor FACtory FAIL FALL FALSe FALling FASTer FAStest FFT FIELD FIFty FILEFormat FILESystem FIRSt FIVEdivs FLAg FOCUS FOLder FORCEDRange FORCe FORMAt FORMat FORWards FPAne 1 FRACTional FRAMEID FRAMEType FRAMETypeid FRAMEtype FRAMetime FRAme FREE FREESpace FRENCh FREQuency FUL FUNCtion GAIN GATEWay B 2 GATIng GATing GENeralcall GERMan GND GPIBUsb GRAticule GRId HAMmi ng HANning HARDCopy HBArs HD1080150 HD1080160 HD1080P24 HD1080P25 HD1080PSF24 HD480P60 HD720P60 HDtv HEADER HEADer HEADertime HEIght HERtZ HEXadecimal HFRej HIGH HIGHLimit HIRes HIStogram HIVALue HOLDTime HOLDof f HORZ HORi zontal HORi zontal HPOS HSmode HTTPPort I2c ID TDANDDATA IDFORmat IDentifier IMAGe IMMed IMPedance IN INDBits INDICa
26. Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 314 Sets or queries the line period for the standard under test Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod lt NR3 gt is the custom video line period TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 50 5E 6 sets the video line period to 50 5 us DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 63 5600E 6 indicating the video line period is set to 63 56 us TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN RATE15K RATE20K RATE25K RATE35K RATE5SOK TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN RATE15 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz through 20 kHz This is the standard broadcast rate RATE20 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz through 25 kHz RATE25 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz through 35 kHz RATE35 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 35 kHz through 50 kHz RATESO sets the range of the
27. DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX indicating the high value is don t care SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier 2 232 Group Syntax Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt X gt LIN DATa QUALifier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQua l INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the LIN data qualifier to equal UNEQua sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal LESSEQua sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQua sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER LESSThan sets the data qualifier to lessthan SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is equal SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Group Syntax Arguments
28. Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters The format of this argument is always returned as a query lt QString gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters DDT OACQUIRE STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be started each time a TRG command is sent Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register SESR and entered into the Event Queue For a detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Status and Error DESE lt NR1 gt DESE CLS ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB lt NR1 gt sets the binary bits of the DESER according to this value which ranges from through 255 For example DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 that is the most significant bit in the register is set to 1 the next most significant bit to 1 the next bit to 0 etc The power on default for DESER is all bits set if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER
29. FORWards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 BACKwards means the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge FORWards means the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS starts searching from the end of the waveform record MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that the current search direction is backwards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt Group Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement The waveform is specified by MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Measurement DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 183 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt FALL RISe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt lt x gt specifies which waveform to use where lt x gt 1 is the from waveform and lt x gt 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RIS
30. I2C ADDRess TY Pe Sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C special addresses SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for 12C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection Sets or returns the 12C search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the trigger condition for a B lt x gt R 232C CONDition RS232 trigger SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string B lt x gt R 232C RX DATa SiZe for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition is RX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt R 232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves RX SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa S Ze Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a RS232 Trigger if the Trigger condition is TX SEARCH SEARCH lt
31. SCALE 2E 6 sets the main scale to 2us per division HORIZONTAL SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and related firmware Miscellaneous ID IDN ID might return TEK DP03034 CF 91 1CT FV v1 0000 This indicates the oscilloscope model number configured format and firmware version number Returns the oscilloscope identification code DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax IDN Related Commands ID Examples IDN might return TEKTRONIX DPO3034 SN123456789 CF 91 1CT FV v1 00000 indicating the oscilloscope model number serial number configured number and firmware version number LANGuage Sets or returns the user interface display language This command only affects the oscilloscope displayed language Remote commands and their responses are always in English Group Miscellaneous Syntax LANGuage ENGLish FRENch GERMan ITALian SPANish PORTUguese JAPAnese KOREan RUSSian SIMP1i1fiedchinese TRADitionalchinese LANGuage Examples LANGUAGE might return LANGUAGE ENGLISH LOCk Enables or disables all front panel buttons and knobs There is no front panel equivalent When the front panel is locked neither theFPAnel PRESS nor the FPAnel TURN commands will work They will not generate an error event e
32. Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARi ty LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SS source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS Source Arguments CH1 CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI SS source BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMing Sets or returns the type of SPI framing Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMing SS IDLEtime 2 80 BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMing DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples BUS B lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments BUS B lt x gt TYPE Group Syntax Arguments DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SS specifies framing by SS non 2 wire IDLEtime specifies framing by Idle Time 2 wire BUS B1 SPI FRAMING SS sets the SPI framing type to SS BUS B1 SPI FRAMING IDELTIME might return BUS B1 SPI FRAMING IDELTIME indicating the SPI framing type is set to IDLETIME Sets or returns the
33. Syntax Related Commands Arguments Assigns a new name to an existing file File System FILESystem REName lt old file path gt lt new file path gt FILESystem C WD lt old file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name lt new file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 141 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples FILESYSTEM RENAME E TEKOOOOO SET D MYSETTING SET gives the file named TEK00000 SET the new name of MYSETTING SET The file remains in the root directory on the D drive FILESystem RMDir No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Deletes a named directory This command deletes the specified directory and all of its contents The directory must not be a read only directory File System FILESystem RMDir lt directory path gt FILESystem CWD lt directory path gt is a quoted string that defines the directory name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM RMDIR E OldDirectory removes the directory named OldDirectory from the root of the D drive FILESystem WRITEFile No Query Form Group Syntax
34. The binary bits of the SRER are set according to this value Using an out of range value causes an execution error The power on default for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000 SRE might return 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value of 00100000 STB Read Status Byte returns the contents of the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status MSS bit For information refer to Registers Status and Error STB CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory SRE lt NR1 gt STB might return 96 showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TEKSecure No Query Form This command initializes both waveform and setup memories overwriting any previously stored data These are the WFMInpre WFMOutpre and DATa command values after the TEKSecure operation WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 1 WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 8 WFMOUTPRE ENCDG BIN WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT RI WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR MSB WFMOUTPRE WFID Ch1 DC coupling 100 0mv div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode WFMOUTPRE NR_PT 10000 WFMOUTPRE PT_FMT Y WFMOUTPRE XUNIT s WFMOUTPRE XINCR 4 0000E 9 WFMOUTPRE XZERO 20 0000E 6 WFMOUTPRE PT_OFF O WFMOUTPRE YUNIT V WFMOUTPRE YMULT 4 0000E 3 WFMOUTPRE YOFF 0 0000 WFMOUTPRE Y
35. Two byte wide data ranges from 32768 to 32767 Each data value requires two to seven characters This includes one to five characters to represent the value another character if the value is negative to represent a minus sign and a comma to separate the data points An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this CURVE lt Space gt 110 109 110 110 109 107 109 107 106 105 103 100 97 90 84 80 NOTE You can use ASCII to obtain a readable and easier to format output than binary However the oscilloscope may require bytes to send the same values with ASCII than with binary reducing transmission speed The use of ASCII for waveform data transfer is inefficient ASCII formatted Waveform WAVFRM and Curve CURVE queries exceeding I M points are not supported Binary Data Binary data is represented by signed integer or positive integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified When the byte width is one signed integer data ranges from 128 to 127 and positive integer values range from 0 to 255 When the byte width is two the values range from 32768 to 32767 and positive integer values range from 0 to 65 535 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 47 Command Groups Waveform Data and Record Lengths Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation Waveform Preamble 2 48 Table 2 31 Binary data ranges Byte width Signed integer range Positive integer range 1
36. WAT prevents the oscilloscope from executing any further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete WAVFrm Query Only Group Syntax Returns WFMOutpre and CURVe data for the waveform as specified by the DATA SOUrce command This command is equivalent to sending both WFMOutpre and CURVe with the additional provision that the response to WAVFrm is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and curve The source waveform as specified by DATA SOURCE must be active or the query will not return any data and will generate an error indicator Waveform Transfer WAVF rm DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 331 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre WAVFRM might return the waveform data as wFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 1 BIT_NR 8 ENCDG ASCIT BN_FMT RI BYT_OR MSB WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mV div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode NR_PT 20 PT_FMT Y XUNIT s sXINCR 4 Q0000E 9 XZERO 20 0000E 6 PT_OFF 0 YUNIT Vv sYMULT 4 Q0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 CURVE 2 1 4 2 4 3 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 6 6 7 3 WFMinpre Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples WFMinpre BIT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands 2 332 Returns the waveform formatting and scaling specifications to be applied to the next incoming CURVe command data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre WFMOutpre WFMINPRE
37. is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier lt bin gt is the data in binary format DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used if the trigger search condition is Frame Type SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERRor OVERLoad SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame REMote specifies a remote frame ERROr specifies an error frame OVERLOoad specifies an overload frame SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for a trigger search to a standard or extended format SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SE
38. where lt x gt is the channel number the MATH1 waveform or another reference waveform such as REF1 lt wfm gt lt QString gt saves the specified waveform to the file specified in the quoted string argument Any live channel such as CH1 the MATH1 waveform any reference waveform can be saved to a file ALL lt QString gt saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to a single CSV file specified by the quoted string argument when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET or saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to individual ISF internal save format files with a file name prefix specified by the argument with an underscore _ and the waveform ID such as CH1 REF1 MATH appended to the file name s SAVE WAVEFORM CH1 REF1 saves the CH1 waveform in reference memory location 1 SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET SAVE WAVEFORM ALL E test_folder test1_all csv saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to E test_folder test1l_all csv SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal SAVe wWAVEform ALL E test_folder test1 saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to individual files named E test_folder test1l_ lt wfm gt isf for example test1_CH1 isf SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Group Syntax Specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms Waveform header and timing information is included in the resulting fi
39. 0E 12 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 2 188 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the measurement type defined for the specified measurement slot The measurement slot is specified by lt x gt which ranges from through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe AMP1itude AREa BURSt CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXi mum MEAN MINImum NDUty NEDGECount NOVershoot NPULSECount NwIdth PDUty PEDGECount PERIOd PHASe PK2Pk POVershoot PPULSECount PwIdth RISe RMS MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe AMP1itude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models BURSt measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARe a cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the
40. 53 LAI 73 LA27 1011 VT ESC B 11 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 14 34 54 LA12 74 LA28 1100 FF FS 5 lt c 12 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 15 35 55 LA13 75 LA29 1101 CR GS D 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 16 36 56 LA14 76 LA30 1110 so RS gt E 14 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 17 37 57 LA15 77 UNL 1111 SI US l F 15 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 ADDRESSED UNIVERSAL LISTEN COMMANDS COMMANDS ADDRESSES KEY octal 5 ee GPIB code with ATN asserted ENQ ASCII character hex 5 5 decimal DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual UPPER CASE LOWER CASE 100 Tao 120 TAI6 140 SA0 160 SA16 P 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 101 TAI 121 TAI7 141 SA1 161 SA17 A Q a q 41 65 51 81 61 97 71 113 102 TA2 122 TA18 142 SA2 162 SA18 B R b r 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 114 103 TA3 123 TAI9 143 SA3 163 SA19 c c s 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 104 TA4 124 TA20 144 SA4 164 SA20 D d t 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 105 TAS 125 TA21 145 SA5 165 SA21 E U e u 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 106 TAG 126 TA22 146 SA6 166 SA22 F v f v 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 107 TA7 127 TA23 147 SA7 167 SA23 G g w 47 7 57 87 67 103 77 119 110 Tas 130 TA24 150 SA8 170 SA24 H X x 48 72 58 88 78 120 111 TA9 131 TA25 171 SA25 l Y y 49 73 59 89 79 124 112 TAO 132 TA26 172 SA26 J Z z 4A 74 5A 90 7A 122 113 Tat 133 TA27 173 SA27 K 4B 75 5B 91 7B 123 114 TAI2 134 TA28 174 SA28 L i 4C
41. 7 bit addresses ADDR10 specifies 10 bit addresses SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Conditions 2 228 Sets or returns the I2C address type SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDReSs TYPe GENeralcall1 STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDReSs TYPe GENeralcal1 specifies the GENeralcall address type STARtbyte specifies the STARtbyte address type HSmode specifies the HSmode address type EEPROM specifies the EEPROM address type USER specifies a user address SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is ADDR or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue lt bin gt is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDiti
42. A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is 1 2 V TRIGger A SETHold DATa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands 2 306 Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 80 0000E 3 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data For DPO models you can specify only a single data source Data sources for DPO models may be one of CH1 CH4 or the Auxin port EXT or AUX Group Trigger Syntax DPO Models TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa SoUrce TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce Related Commands TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Arguments DPO Models lt wfm gt specifies the source channel number and is one of CH1 CH4 EXT or AUX You can specify only one waveform on a DPO Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the clock source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the current clock source for the setup a
43. A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Sets or returns the error type Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for a RX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a TX RS232 Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a TX RS232 trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 15 Command Groups Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current state of oscilloscope calibration They also initiate internal signal path calibration SPC or execute diagnostic tests Commands that are specific to factory calibration are not described in this manual They are described in the
44. A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALUue lt QString gt is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe command The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions 2 284 Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source for a Serial bus trigger This command requires a DPO3AUTO or DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 B3 B4 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 specifies the Bus 1 source B2 specifies the Bus 2 source B3 specifies the Bus 3 source B4 specifies the Bus 4 source TRIGger A EDGE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A PULse TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A EDGE might return TRIGGER A ED
45. A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE COUPling DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive which triggers on the rising edge of the signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE FALL indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 EXT LINE AUX TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE COUPling CH1 CH4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope LINE specifies the AC line as the trigger source AUX specifies the Auxiliary Input as the trigger source if available on your oscilloscope TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source TRIGger A HOLDoff Query Only Group Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters These parameters specify
46. ALlas CATalog Query Only Group Syntax Examples ALlas DEFine Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 58 Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels separated by commas If no aliases are defined the query returns the string Alias ALIas CATalog ALIAS CATALOG might return the string ALIAS CATALOG SETUPL TESTMENUL DEFAULT showing that there are three aliases named SETUP1 TESTMENU1 and DEFAULT Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a command or query provided that ALIas STATE has been turned on The query form of this command returns the definitions of a selected alias NOTE Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error To give a new alias the name of an existing alias the existing alias must first be deleted Alias ALIas DEFine lt QString gt lt gt lt QString gt lt Block gt ALIas DEFine lt QString gt ALlas STATE The first lt QString gt is the alias label This label cannot be a command name Labels must start with a letter and can contain only letters numbers and underscores other characters are not allowed The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The second lt Qstring gt or lt Block gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages
47. B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Use this command to do the following Trigger on ID m Trigger in IDANDDATA Conditions This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard ExTended TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Arguments STandard specifies the standard addressing mode ExTended specifies the extended addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for a CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Arguments lt QString gt is up to 29 bits specifying the binary CAN identifier value The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1L CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE 1011 sets the CAN trigger identifier value to 1011 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 273 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the I2C address mode
48. DELta 2 109 CURSor X Y POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt 2 109 CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts 2 109 CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta 2 110 CURSor X Y PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt 2 110 CURSor X Y PRODUCT UNIts 2 110 CURSor XY RATIO DELta 2 110 CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt 2 111 Index 2 CURSor XY RATIO UNIts 2 111 CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta 2 111 CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt 2 111 CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts 2 112 CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta 2 112 CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt 2 112 CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts 2 112 CURSor 2 101 CURSor FUNCtion 2 101 CURSor HBArs 2 102 CURSor HBArs DELTa 2 102 CURSor HBArs UNIts 2 103 CURSor HBArs USE 2 103 CURSor MODe 2 104 CURSor VBArs 2 104 CURSor VBArs DELTa 2 105 CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 107 CURSor VBArs USE 2 107 CURVe 2 113 D DATa 2 114 DATa DESTination 2 115 DATa ENCdg 2 115 DATa SOUrce 2 116 DATa STARt 2 117 DATa STOP 2 118 DATE 2 119 DDT 2 119 DESE 2 120 DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes 2 121 DIAg SELect lt function gt 2 123 DIAg LOOP OPTion 2 121 DIAg LOOP STOP 2 121 DIAg RESUIt FLAg 2 122 DIAg RESUIt LOG 2 122 DIAg SELect 2 123 DIAg STATE 2 124 Display Command Group 2 18 DISplay INTENSITy BACK Light 2 126 DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule 2 127 DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform 2 127 DISplay STYle DOTsonly 2 128 DISplay 2 124 DISplay CLOCKk 2 124 DISplay FORMat 2 125 DIS
49. Event Status Enable Register ESER Read using ESE Write using ESE Status Byte Register SBR Read using STB Cannot be written Service Request Enable Register SRER Read using SRE Write using SRE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC V 7 6 5 4 3 2 h Jo PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Event Event Event 7 6 5 4 3 h2 h Jo PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bye ESB MAV ESB MV Figure 3 6 Status and Event Handling Process 3 6 Event Queue Output Queue When an event occurs a signal is sent to the DESER 1 If that type of event is enabled in the DESER that is if the bit for that event type is set to 1 the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated 7 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Synchroni
50. Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALUe lt QString gt is the CAN data value in binary format The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE 1011 sets the CAN data value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 272 Sets or returns the frame type fora CAN FRAMEType trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module This command is only valid when the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition is FRAMETYPE Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERRor OVERLoad TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame type REMote specifies a remote frame type ERRor specifies an error frame type OVERLO1d specifies an overload frame type TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type to DATA DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS
51. Manual 3 11 Status and Events 3 12 Messages No Event Command Error Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC Wait for read from Output Queue Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This is the simplest approach It requires no status handling or loops However you must set the controller time out for longer than the acquisition operation The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming interface messages the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries For most messages a secondary message from the oscilloscope gives detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message This message is part of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon Each message is the result of an event Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER Thus each message is associated with a specific SESR bit In the message tables the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title with exceptions noted with the error message text The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report These have no associated SESR bit Table 3 3 No Event Messages
52. PULse 2 298 TRIGger A RUNT 2 301 TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 303 TRIGger A SETHold 2 304 TRIGger A TY Pe 2 312 TRIGger A VIDeo 2 313 TRIGger B 2 320 TRIGger B BY 2 321 TRIGger B EDGE 2 322 TRIGger B EVENTS 2 324 TRIGger B LEVel 2 324 TRIGger B STATE 2 326 TRIGger B TIMe 2 327 TRIGger B TYPe 2 327 TRIGger EXTernal 2 328 TRIGger STATE 2 329 TST 2 329 U UNLock 2 330 V VERBose 2 330 Vertical Command Group 2 44 W WAI 2 331 Waveform Transfer Command Group 2 47 WAVFrm 2 331 WFMInpre 2 332 WFMInpre BIT_Nr 2 332 WFMInpre BN_ Fmt 2 333 WFMInpre BYT_Nr 2 333 WFMInpre BYT_ Or 2 334 WFMInpre ENCdg 2 334 WFMInpre NR_ Pt 2 335 WFMInpre PT_Fmt 2 335 WFMInpre PT_Off 2 336 WFMInpre XINcr 2 337 WFMInpre XUNit 2 337 WFMInpre XZEro 2 338 WFMInpre Y MUIt 2 338 WFMInpre Y OFF 2 339 WFMInpre YUNit 2 340 WFMInpre Y ZEro 2 340 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual WFMOutpre FRACTional 2 344 WFMOutpre 2 341 WFMOutpre BIT_Nr 2 342 WFMOutpre BN_Fmt 2 342 WFMOutpre BYT_Nr 2 343 WFMOutpre BYT_Or 2 343 WFMOutpre ENCdg 2 344 WFMOutpre NR_Pt 2 345 WFMOutpre PT_Fmt 2 345 WFMOutpre PT_Off 2 346 WFMOutpre PT_ORder 2 346 WFMOutpre WFId 2 347 WFMOutpre XINcr 2 348 WFMOutpre XUNit 2 348 WFMOutpre XZEro 2 348 WFMOutpre YMUIt 2 349 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Index WFMOutpre YOFf 2 349 WFMOutpre Y UNit 2 350 WFMOutpre YZEro 2 350 Z Zo
53. Query Form 2 144 Group Syntax Arguments Simulates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob When the front panel is locked the front panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended The FPAnel PRESS and FPAnel TURN commands will also not work and they will not generate an error You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands For example to set the trigger level to 50 you could use TRIGger A SETLevel To force a trigger you could use TRIGger FORCe Miscellaneous FPAnel TURN lt knob gt lt n gt lt knob gt is the name of a rotating control A comma separates the control knob argument from the numeric rotation value argument You do not need a white space between the arguments and the comma lt n gt represents the rotation direction and magnitude of rotation Negative values represent a counterclockwise knob rotation and positive values represent a DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order clockwise rotation The magnitude of lt n gt specifies the amount of the turn where lt n gt represents turning the knob one unit lt n gt 2 represents turning the knob two units lt n gt 4 represents turning the knob four units and so on The range of units depends on which front panel knob is specified Table 2 37 FPAnel TURN arguments
54. Related Commands Arguments 2 142 Writes the specified block data to a file in the oscilloscope current working directory If the specified file does not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted File System FILESystem WRITEFile lt file path gt lt data gt FILESystem CWD lt file path gt is the quoted string that defines the file name and path If the path is within the current working directory specify the file name only lt data gt can be either DEFINITE LENGTH encoding or INDEFINITE LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding as described in IEEE488 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FPAnel PRESS No Query Form Simulates the action of pressing a specified front panel button When the front panel is locked the front panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended The FPAnel PRESS and the FPAnel TURN commands will also not work You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands Group Miscellaneous Syntax FPAnel PRESS lt button gt Arguments lt button gt is thename of a front panel button Most of the argument names associate directly with their front panel buttons For example AUTOSet is for the Autoset button The few commands that do not have obvious associations are listed below Table 2 36 FPAnel PRESS arguments
55. SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MOST VALUE XX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search condition for a CAN trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF FRAMEtype IDenti fier DATA IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS ERROR SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF specifies a search based on the start of frame FRAMEtype specifies a search based on the frame type IDentifier specifies a search based on the frame identifier DATA specifies a search based on the frame data IDANDDATA specifies a search based on the frame identifier and data EOF specifies a search base on the end of frame ACKMISS specifies a search based on the missing ACK field ERROR specifies a search based on a bit stuffing error SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 224 Conditions Sets or returns the CAN search to be valid for Read Write or Either condition if the criteria is IDentifier SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This only applies if the search condi
56. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VA Lue 2 233 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 234 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VA Lue 2 234 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VA Lue 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue 2 237 Index 5 Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOS OUT VALue 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH
57. Sets or returns the RS232C polarity for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS232 RX source BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS232 TX Source BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SS source BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMing Sets or returns the type of SPI framing BUS B lt x gt STATE Turns the specified bus on and off BUS B lt x gt TYPE Sets or returns the specified bus type BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower threshold for each channel BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the threshold for a channel BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the upper threshold for each channel SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Returns the serial search type SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets
58. TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue lt QString gt is the binary data string where the number of bits is 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN Bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField IDenti fier DATA IDANDDATA WAKEup SLEEP ERROR TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField sets the LIN trigger condition to sync field IDentifier sets the LIN trigger condition to identifier DATA sets the LIN trigger condition to data IDANDDATA sets the LIN trigger condition to id and data WAKEup sets the LIN trigger condition to wake up SLEEP sets the LIN trigger condition to sleep DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 277 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating the LIN trigger condition is sync field TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HI
59. TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 309 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A TRANSITION might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN SLOWER DELTATIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall DELTatime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime lt NR3 gt specifies the delta time in seconds TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 15E 6 sets the delta time of the transition trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments 2 310 Sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity E1ITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering
60. TRIGger EXTernal PRObe DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector 2 43 Command Groups Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts Returns the external trigger vertical Y units value TRIGger STATE Returns the current state of the triggering system Vertical Command Group 2 44 Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of all live channel waveforms for acquisition and to display of channel reference and math waveforms Table 2 30 Vertical Commands Command Description AUXin Returns auxiliary input parameters AUXin PRObe Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxilary input AUXin PRObe AUTOZero Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the auxiliary input to autozero AUXin PRObe COMMAND Sets the state of the specified probe control AUXin PRObe DEGAUss Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe DEGAUss S TATE Returns the degauss state of the TekVPI current probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range of the TekVPI probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the serial num
61. TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel input to autozero CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND Sets the state of the specified probe control CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the specified channel input CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Returns the state of the probe degauss CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range on a TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the type and serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal Sets or returns the input bypass setting of channel lt x gt TekVPI probe CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Returns the units of measure of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 45 Command Groups 2 46 Table 2 30 Vertical Commands cont
62. and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set the ESER DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits DESE might return DESE 186 showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual DIAg LOOP OPTion Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets the self test loop option Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP OPTion ALWAYS FAIL ONFAIL ONCE NTIMES ALWAYS continues looping until the self tests diagnostics are stopped via the front panel or by an oscilloscope command FAIL causes looping until the first self test diagnostic failure or until self tests diagnostics are stopped ONFAIL causes looping on a specific test group as long as a FAIL status is returned from the test ONCE executes self test diagnostics test sequence once NTIMES runs n number of loops DIAG LOOP OPTION ONCE runs one loop of self tests DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the self test loop option to run N times Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt is the number of self test loops DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 3 sets the self test loop to run three times DIAG L
63. can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 256 characters Examples ALIAS DEFINE ST1 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ON defines an alias named ST1 that sets up the oscilloscope ALIAS DEFINE ST1 returns ALIAS DEFINE STL 246 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ON ALlas DELEte No Query Form Removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas DELEte NAMe An error message is generated if the named alias does not exist Group Alias Syntax ALIas DELEte lt QString gt Related Commands ESR ALIas DELEte ALL Arguments lt QString gt is the name of the alias to be removed Using ALIas DELEte without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must bea previously defined value Examples ALIAS DELETE SETUP1 deletes the alias named SETUPI ALlas DELEte ALL No Query Form Deletes all existing aliases Group Alias Syntax AlIas DELEte ALL Related Commands ALlIas DELEte ALIas DELEte NAMe DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 59 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ALIAS DELETE ALL deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples ALlas STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples ALLEv Query Only 2 60 Removes a specified alias This command is identical
64. each record HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH might return HORIZONTAL RECOrdlength 1000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 1000 data points HORizontal RESOlution Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame The sample rate is automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant time per division The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length Horizontal HORizontal RESOlution lt NR1 gt HORizontal RESOlution lt NR1 gt represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths For additional information about valid data point ranges select Specifications from the Help menu and choose the Horizontal amp Acquisition tab HORizontal SAMPLERate Group Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate Horizontal DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 155 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax Arguments Examples ID Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples IDN Query Only 2 156 HORizontal SAMPLERate lt NR3 gt HORi zontal SAMPLERate lt NR3 gt is the sample rate in seconds Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale Horizontal HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt HORi zontal SCAle lt NR3 gt specifies the range from ns to 1000 s depending on the record length HORIZONTAL
65. for the incoming waveform are volts WFMINPRE YUNIT A specifies that the vertical units for the incoming waveform are Amperes Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform in units specified by WFMInpre YUNit Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical offset of the waveform YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve _in_dl is a data point in CURVe DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order value _in_units curve_in_dl YOFf_in_dl YMUIt YZEro_in_units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YZEro WFMInpre YUNit WFMOutpre YZEro lt NR3 gt is the offset in YUNits WFMINPRE YZERO 1 5E 0 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 1 5 V below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMINPRE YZERO might return WFMINPRE YZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7 5 uV below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMOutpre Query Only Group Syntax Exa
66. gt TY Pe CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is the math waveform which is always 1 REF lt x gt is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE2 CH1 specifies CH1 as the delay to source when making delay measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math 1 is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt 2 186 Group Syntax Arguments For SOURce 1 Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements For delay or phase measurements sets or returns the waveform to measure from For SOUrce2 Sets or returns the waveform to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt CH lt x gt MATH MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH is the math waveform REF lt x gt is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed The measurement slot is specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 For a measurement to display you must have selected a source wavef
67. high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all math searches that use a lower threshold lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments 2 248 Sets or returns the reference waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all reference searches that use a lower threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity
68. horizontal commands Horizontal HORi zontal HORIZONTAL might return the following horizontal settings HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 TIME 0 0000 HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 20 0000E 9 SAMPLERATE 2 5000E 9 UNITS S UNITS STRING s HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE 2 5000E 9 RECORDLENGTH 5000000 HORizontal ACQLENGTH Query Only Group Syntax 2 150 Returns the record length Horizontal HOR1 zontal ACQLENGTH DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal RECOrdlength HORIZONTAL ACQLENGTH might return HORiZontal ACQLENGTH HORIZONTAL ACQLENGTH 1 0000E 6 indicating that the record length is 1 million points HORizontal DELay MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode Horizontal HORizontal DELay MODe OFF ON lt NR1 gt HORi zontal DELay MODe HORizontal POSition OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off This causes the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off any other value sets this mode to on HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off allowing the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE might return HORIZONTA
69. indicators show where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators STATE Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF MEAS lt x gt MEASUrement INDICators STATE Arguments OFF turns the visible measurement indicators off MEAS lt x gt displays the visible measurement indicators for measurement lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 NOTE There must be an active measurement before you can activate an indicator for a specified measurement Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS2 turns on the display of visible measurement indicators for measurement 2 MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF indicating that no measurement indicators are active MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Query Only Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator lt x gt from the trigger point where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 A negative value means that the indicator is positioned earlier in the waveform record than the trigger point Group Measurement DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 181 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Examples MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 3 724507E 6 indicating that the second measurement indicat
70. is the search number This command requires a DPO3AUTO or DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 B3 B4 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 specifies the Bus 1 source B2 specifies the Bus 2 source B3 specifies the Bus 3 source B4 specifies the Bus 4 source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 239 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where lt x gt is the channel number MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to plac
71. level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 1 60 sets the mid reference level to 60 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 65 indicating that the percentage mid reference level is set to 65 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 198 Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of delay measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 40 sets the mid2 reference level to 40 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 45 indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45 of HIGH DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel lt x gt where x is the measureme
72. lt file path gt REF lt x gt Related Commands SAVe WAVEform FILESystem CWD FILESystem Arguments REF lt x gt specifies a location in internal reference memory Reference memory location values range from 1 through 4 lt file path gt specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and one or lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will read the file from the default directory see FILESystem CWD lt filename gt stands for a filename the use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended Examples RECALL WAVEFORM TEKOO000 ISF REF1 recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000 ISF from the current directory for waveforms to the reference location 1 REF lt x gt Query Only Returns reference waveform data for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt 2 210 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt DATE Query Only Returns the date that reference waveform data for channel lt x gt was copied into the internal reference memory where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt DATE REF l
73. lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALUue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the search condition for a SPI trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS MISO MOSI MISOMOST SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS specifies a search based on the Slave Selection condition MISO specifies a search based on the Master In Slave Out condition MOST specifies a search based on the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOST specifies a search based on the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 237 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B l
74. might return the waveform formatting as wFMINPRE BIT_NR 8 BN_FMT RI BYT_NR 1 BYT_OR MSB ENCDG BIN NR_PT 500 PT_FMT Y PT_OFF 0 XINCR 2 0000E 6 XZERO 1 7536E 6 XUNIT S YMULT 1 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 YUNIT Vv Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming waveform Changing the value of WFMInpre BIT_ Nr also changes the value of WEFMInpre BYT_Nr Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BIT_Nr lt NRI1 gt WFMInpre BIT_Nr WEMInpre BYT_Nr DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WFMinpre BN_Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt number of bits per data point can be 8 or 16 WFMINPRE BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for incoming data WFMINPRE BIT_NR might return WFMINPRE BIT_NR 8 indicating that incoming waveform data uses 8 bits per waveform point Sets or returns the format of binary data for incoming waveforms Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BN_Fmt RI RP WFMInpre BN_Fmt WFMOutpre BN_Fmt RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN_FMT RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN_FMT might return WFMINPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the incoming data is curren
75. place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn TRUe FALSe LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn TRUe places a mark when the pattern becomes true FALSe places a mark when the pattern becomes false LeESSThan places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit command DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 245 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Than places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command EQUa places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command but less than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command UNEQual places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command or longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn MORELimit command SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A log
76. returns the 12C address mode to 7 or 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns the 12C address type to USER TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for the 12C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 2C CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for I2C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection Sets or returns the 12C trigger condition valid on a READ WRITE or either DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 37 Command Groups 2 38 Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for 12C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for 12C triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Sets or returns the condition for a RS232C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for a RX RS232 Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt R 232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string fora RX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string for a TX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condit
77. selected mark The selected mark is at or near the center of the screen If you press the front panel Set Clear button this mark will disappear Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected STATe MARK SELected ZOOm POSition Query Only Returns the position of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the zoom overview window Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected Z0Om POSition MARK TOTal Query Only Returns how many marks are currently in use Group Mark Syntax MARK TOTal 2 162 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual MATH MATH1 LABel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform Math MATH MATH1 LABel lt QString gt MATH MATH1 LABel lt QString gt is the quoted string used as the label for the math waveform MATH LABEL Output sets the label for the math waveform to Output MATH LABEL might return MATH LABEL Sum of channel 1 and channel 2 indicating the current label for the math waveform MATH 1 Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples MATH 1 DEFine Returns the definition of the math waveform The returned data depends on the setting of the MATH 1 TYPe command Math MATH 1 MATH 1 TYPe MATH or MATH1 might return MATH TYPE DUAL DEFINE CH1 CH2 5 VERTICAL SCALE 100 0000E 3 POSITION 0 0000 UNITS V 1MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 Q0000E 6 POSITION 50 0000 UNITS s MATH SPECTR
78. slower than the time set by TRIGger A TRAnSition RISEFal1 DELTatime DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 311 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGger A TYPe 2 312 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments EQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime UNEQua sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN FASTER Sets or returns the type of A trigger The five types of triggers are of Edge Logic Pulse Serial and Video Logic and Pulse triggers contain classes Logic triggers consist of State Pattern and SetHold classes Pulse triggers consist of Runt Width and Transition logic classes Once you have set the trigger type you may also need to identify the associated trigger class For details on selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes see TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss and TRIGger A PULse CLAss respectively Trigger TRIGger A TYPe EDGe LOGic PULSe BUS VIDeo TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGger A PULse CLAss EDGe is a normal trigger A trigger event oc
79. specifies that the next acquisition will be a single sequence acquisition ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUnSTOP sets the oscilloscope to continually acquire data ACQUIRE STOPAFTER might return ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE indicating that the next acquisition the oscilloscope makes will be of the single sequence type Sets or returns the state of alias functionality Use Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies To use Alias commands first define the alias then turn on the alias state Alias ALIas OFF ON lt NR1 gt ALIas ALIas DEFine ALlIas STATE OFF turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALIas is off a command error 110 will be generated ON turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed lt NR1 gt 0 disables alias mode any other value enables alias mode DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 57 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS might return ALIAS 1 indicating that the alias feature is on
80. specifies the number of lt Dig gt elements that follow Taken together the lt NZDig gt and lt Dig gt elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many lt DChar gt elements follow DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Block Argument ALIas DEFINE SETUp1 231AUTOSet EXECute SELect REF1 ON Block Header Specifies Data Length Specifies Number of Length Digits that Follow DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 9 Command Syntax 2 10 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups This manual lists the Tektronix 3000 Series IEEE488 2 commands in two ways First it presents them by functional groups Then it lists them alphabetically The functional group list starts below The alphabetical list provides detail on each command See page 2 53 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Acquisition Command Group Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and functions that control how the oscilloscope acquires signals input to the channels and processes them into waveforms Using the commands in this group you can do the following Start and stop acquisitions Control whether each waveform is simply acquired averaged or enveloped over successive acquisitions of that waveform Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions Control acquisition of channel waveforms Set acquisition parameters Table 2 13 Acquisition Commands
81. that do not support degauss operations Vertical AUXin PRObe DEGAUSS STATE AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS STATE might return AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS STATE PASSED indicating that the probe has been degaussed DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 63 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Changes or returns the range on a Tek VPI probe attached to the Aux In input Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange lt NR3 gt AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Arguments lt NR3 gt is the probe range which is probe dependent AUXin PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of a probe that is attached to the Aux In input Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe GAIN lt NR3 gt AUXin PRObe GAIN Arguments lt NR3 gt is the probe gain which is probe dependent Examples AUXin PROBE GAIN might return AUXin PROBE GAIN 100 0000E 3 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0 1 V to the Aux In BNC for every 1 0 V applied to the probe input AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber AUXin PRObe ID TYPE Query Only Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input 2 64 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe 1D TYPE AUXin PRObe RESistance Query Only Returns the resistance of the p
82. the Enable Registers at power on as follows DESER 255 equivalent to a DESe 255 command ESER 0 equivalent to an ESE 0 command SRER 0 equivalent to an SRE 0 command Sending PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle NOTE To enable the PON Power On event to generate a Service Request send PSC 0 use the DESe and ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER and use the SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after an lt EOM gt The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command or query or it will lose responses to earlier queries CAUTION When a controller sends a query an lt EOM gt and a second query the oscilloscope normally clears the first response and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error OYE bit in the ESER to indicate the lost response A fast controller however may receive a part or all of the first response as well To avoid this situation the controller should always read the response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL Device Clear befor
83. the display format for the numerical information in the bus waveform lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3 AUTO DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt BINary HEXadecimal ASCII MIxXed BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt BUS B lt x gt TYPE BINary specifies a binary data display HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display ASCII specifies an ASCII format for RS232 only MIXed specifies a mixed format for LIN only BUS B lt x gt DiSplay TYPe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the display type for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number You can set up the bus to display the protocol information the logic waveforms that comprise the bus or both This command requires a DPO3 AUTO DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe BUS BOTh BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe BUS displays the bus waveforms only BOTh displays both the bus and logic waveforms BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude Group Syntax Sets and returns whether the read write bit is included in the address Bus BUS B lt x gt 1I12C ADDRess RWINClude lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess RWINC lude DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 69 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
84. the high threshold NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is negative TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY might return TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax 2 302 Sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH1 CH4 specifies the input channel number depending on the model of the oscilloscope TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual OCCURS TRIGger A RUNT WHEN TRIGger A RUNT WIDth OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESStha
85. the lower reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe lt NR3 gt is the low reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0 sets the low reference level to 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0000E 00 indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0 0 V DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 193 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the mid reference level and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts The defaul
86. the oscilloscope from executing further commands until all pending operations finish Trigger Command Group 2 36 Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of triggering for the oscilloscope There are two triggers A and B Where appropriate this command set has parallel construction between triggers You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode Edge triggering lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing You can also set A triggers to pulse logic or video modes With pulse triggering the oscilloscope triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or channels The oscilloscope then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels Video triggering enables you to trigger on the most common Standard Definition video standards Table 2 29 Trigger Commands Command Description TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur TRIGger A Sets A trigger level to 50 or returns current A trigger parameters TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the serial trigger type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Sets or returns the CAN condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition to be valid ona READ WRITE or either TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the CAN da
87. the slope for the B trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE RISe triggers on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL triggers on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE FALL sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling slope TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT LINE TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TRIGger B EDGE CH lt x gt specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope as the B trigger source LINE specifies the power line as the B trigger source TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the input source for the B trigger TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is channel 1 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 323 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B EVENTS Query Only Group Syntax Related Co
88. the time period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 287 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Examples TRIGger A HOLDoff TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe TRIGGER A HOLDOFF might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 900 0000E 09 BY DEFAULT indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time by default is 900 ns TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A LEVel Group Syntax Arguments 2 288 Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time Trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe lt NR3 gt specifies the holdoff time in seconds The range is from 20 ns through 8 0 s TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFFTIME 1 2000E 06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1 2 ps TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger Trigger TRIGger A LEVel ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LEVel ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A LEVEL might return TRIGGER A LEVel 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1
89. these string arguments Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND lt QString gt lt QString gt lt QString gt are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in the probe attached to the specified channel CH1 PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4V1MHz sets a Tektronix VPI DPG probe to the 4 4V1MHz mode CH1 PROBE COMMAND OUTPUT ON turns the output of a Tektronix VPI DPG probe on CH1 PROBE COMMAND MODE might return CH1 PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4V1MHZ CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss No Query Form Group Starts a degauss auto zero cycle on a Tek VPI current probe attached to the input channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 93 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUSS EXECute EXECute initiates the degauss operation CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns the state of the probe degauss for the channel specified by lt x gt where is x is the channel number NOTE This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUSS STATE NEEDED indicates the probe should be degaussed before taking measurements RECOMMENDED indicates the measurement accuracy might be improved by degaussing the probe PASSED indicates the probe is degaussed FAILE
90. through 4 MATH specifies that the Math waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller REF1 REF4 specifies which Reference waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller waveforms through 4 DATA SOURCE might return DATA SOURCE REF3 indicating that the source for the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe query is reference 3 DATA SOURCE CH1 specifies that the CH1 waveform will be transferred in the next CURVe query Sets or returns the starting data point for incoming or outgoing waveform transfer This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope Waveform Transfer DATa STARt lt NR1 gt DATa STARt CURVe DATa DATa STOP WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt lt NR1 gt is the first data point that will be transferred which ranges from 1 to the record length Data will be transferred from lt NR1 gt to DATa STOP or the record length whichever is less If lt NR1 gt is greater than the record length the last data point in the record is transferred DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 117 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DATa STOP 2 118 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is greater than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query DATA START might return DATA START
91. to 7 or 10 bit Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies the 7 bit I2C address mode ADDR10 specifies the 10 bit I2C address mode TRIGGER A BUS B1 1I12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR1O sets the I2C address mode to 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 274 Sets or returns the I2C address type The only supported address type is USER Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcal1 specifies a general call address STARtbyte specifies a start byte address HSmode specifies a high speed mode address EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address USER specifies a user address DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary address string used for the IC trigger if the trigger condition is ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger
92. to ALIas DELEte Alias ALTas DELEte NAMe lt QString gt lt QString gt is the name of the alias to remove Using ALIas DELEte NAMe without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must be an existing alias ALIAS DELETE NAME STARTUP deletes the alias named STARTUP Turns aliases on or off This command is identical to the ALIas command Alias ALIas STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON ALIas STATE OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALlIas STATE is OFF a command error 102 is generated ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS STATE OFF turns the command alias feature off ALIAS STATE returns 0 when the alias feature is off Prompts the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages delimited by commas and removes the returned events from the Event Queue Use the ESR DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order query to enable the events to be returned This command is similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the oscilloscope Status and Error ALLEv ESR EVMsg Examples ALLEV might return ALLEV 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 420 Query UNTERMINATED AUTOSet No Query Form Sets the vertical horizonta
93. video line scan rate to 50 kHz through 65 kHz TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATELS5 sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to Rate 1 which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz standard broadcast rate TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATE20 indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger custom video is set to Rate20 which is 20 kHz to 25 kHz TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCinterval Conditions Sets or queries the sync interval for the standard under test This is only required for BiLevel Custom Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO3VID application module DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 315 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom lt NR3 gt is the sync interval TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM set to 4 0 ps TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM interval is set to 4 72 us TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Sets or returns the HDTV video signal format on which to trigger Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 316 SYNCInterval lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOM SYNCInterval SYNCINTERVAL 4 0E 6 sets the sync interval is SYNCINTERVAL might return SYNCINTERVAL 4 7200E 6 indicating the sync This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat HD1080P24 HD720P60 HD
94. with a resolution of 1 ps CH4 DESKew 5 0E 9 sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns CH2 DESKew might return CH2 DESKEW 2 0000E 09 indicating that the deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns Sets or returns the input impedance of channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt IMPedance lt NR3 gt FIFty SEVENTYFive MEG CH lt x gt IMPedance FIFty sets the input impedance of channel lt x gt to 50Q SEVENTYF ive sets the input impedance of channel lt x gt to 75Q MEG sets the input impedance of channel lt x gt to 1 MQ lt NR3 gt specifies the input impedance for channel lt x gt Valid values are 50 75 or 1 00E 06 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 89 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt INVert Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 90 Sets or returns the invert function for channel lt x gt where is the channel number When on the invert function inverts the waveform for the specified channel NOTE This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only The oscilloscope does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs Vertical CH lt x gt INVert ON OFF CH lt x gt INVert OFF sets the invert function for channel lt x gt to off ON sets the invert function for channel lt x gt to on CH4 INVert ON inverts the waveform on channel 4 CH2 IN
95. without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EITher places a mark on a runt of either polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual OCCURS SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEN OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 251 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH l
96. x gt CAN SOUrce 2 68 BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt 2 68 BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe 2 69 BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude 2 69 BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 70 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce 2 70 BUS B lt x gt LABel 2 71 BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate 2 71 BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat 2 71 BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity 2 72 BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint 2 72 BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce 2 73 BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard 2 73 BUS B lt x gt POSition 2 74 BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate 2 74 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 2 75 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter 2 75 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode 2 75 BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity 2 76 BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity 2 76 BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce 2 77 BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce 2 77 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity 2 78 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce 2 78 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity 2 79 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce 2 79 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity 2 77 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUtrce 2 78 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity 2 80 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce 2 80 BUS B lt x gt STATE 2 81 BUS B lt x gt TYPE 2 81 BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMing 2 80 BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 82 BUS THReshold CH lt x gt 2 82 BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 83 BUSY 2 83 C CAL 2 84 CALibr
97. x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves RX SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for SPI search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOS OUT VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or returns the bus for a serial search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Command Groups Description SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LEVel Sets or returns the level for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Sets or returns the level for an edge search of the specified channel SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TR
98. 0 Returns the vertical offset in units specified by WFMOutpre YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on See the description of WFMInpre YZEro to see how this offset is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax WFMOutpre YZEro Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre YUNit Examples WFMOUTPRE YZERO might return WFMOUTPRE YZERO 100 0000E 3 indicating that vertical offset is set to 100 mV ZOOm Query Only Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display Group Zoom Syntax Zoom Examples ZOOM might return ZOOM MODE 1 GRATICULE SIZE 80 SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 SCALE 400 OOOOE 12 POSITION 46 8986 FACTOR 50 0000E 3 HORIZONTAL POSITION 46 8986 SCALE 40 0 0000E 12 ZOOm MODe STATE Turns Zoom mode on or off The Zoom query returns the current state of Zoom mode This command is equivalent to pressing the zoom button located on the front panel Group Zoom Syntax ZOoOm MODe STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt Zoom MODe STATE Arguments ON turns on Zoom mode OFF turns off Zoom mode lt NR1 gt 0 turns off Zoom mode any other value turns on Zoom mode DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 351 Commands Liste
99. 0 mV div 10 V 5 V 505 mV div 995 mV div 5 V 5 V 1 Vidiv 5 V div 100 V 5 V 1 5 05 V div 10 V div 50 V N A 1 1 For 50 75 Q input 1 V div is the maximum setting NOTE The above table describes oscilloscope behavior only when no probe is attached and when the external attenuation factor is 1 0 Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt OFFSet lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt OFFSet Related Commands CH lt x gt POSition Arguments lt NR3 gt is the offset value for the specified channel lt x gt Examples CH3 OFFSet 2 0E 3 sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV CH4 OFFSet might return CH4 OFFSET 1 0000E 03 indicating that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 91 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt POSition Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the vertical position of channel lt x gt where x is the channel number The position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up Decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values minus the present offset setting for that channel are displayed For example if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2 0 and the offset is set to 3 0 then input signals equal to 3 0 units are displayed
100. 128 to 127 0 to 255 2 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 65 535 The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are transferred The four binary formats are RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary and SRPbinary RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first and RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first The byte order is ignored when DATa WIDth is set to 1 You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record You can use the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands to specify the first and last data points of the waveform record When transferring data into the oscilloscope you must first specify the record length of the destination waveform record You do this with the WFMInpre NR_ Pt command Next specify the first data point within the waveform record For example when you set DATa STARt to 1 data points will be stored starting with the first point in the record The oscilloscope will ignore the value set by DATa STOP when reading in data It will stop reading data when there is no data to read or when it has reached the specified record length When transferring data from the oscilloscope you must specify the first and last d
101. 2 HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing 2 153 HORizontal MAIn UNIts 2 153 HORizontal PREViewstate 2 154 HORizontal RECOrdlength 2 155 HORizontal RESOlution 2 155 HORizontal SAMPLERate 2 155 HORizontal 2 150 HORizontal MAIn SCAle 2 153 HORizontal MAIn 2 152 HORizontal POSition 2 154 HORizontal SCAle 2 156 ID 2 156 IDN 2 156 L LANGuage 2 157 LOCk 2 157 LRN 2 158 Mark Command Group 2 22 MARK 2 159 MARK SELected FOCUS 2 161 MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn 2 161 MARK SELected O0WNer 2 161 MARK SELected SOURCE 2 161 Index 3 Index MARK SELected STARt 2 162 MARK SELected STATe 2 162 MARK SELected ZOOm POSition 2 162 MARK CREATE 2 159 MARK DELEte 2 160 MARK FREE 2 160 MARK SELected END 2 160 MARK TOTal 2 162 Math Command Group 2 24 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition 2 165 MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle 2 165 MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts 2 166 MATH 1 SPECTral MAG 2 166 MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow 2 167 MATH 1 VERTical POSition 2 168 MATH 1 VERTical SCAle 2 168 MATH 1 VERTical UNIts 2 169 MATH 1 2 163 MATH 1 DEFine 2 163 MATH 1 TYPe 2 167 MATH MATH1 LABel 2 163 MATHVAR VAR lt x gt 2 170 MATHVAR 2 169 Measurement Command Group 2 25 MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot 2 171 MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection 2 173 MEASUrement MMed DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 173 MEASUrement MMed DELay 2 172 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 2 174 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt 2 175 MEA
102. 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen at 1 V div Vertical CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt POSition CH lt x gt OFFSet REF lt x gt VERTical POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the position value for channel lt x gt in divisions from the center graticule The range is 8 to 8 divisions CH2 POSition 1 3 positions the Channel 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above the center graticule CH1 POSition might return CHL POSITION 1 3000 indicating that the current position of Channel 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center graticule CH lt x gt PRObe Query Only Group Syntax 2 92 Returns all information concerning the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Sets the Tek VPI probe attached to channel lt x gt to zero where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero EXECute Execute auto zeros the probe CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state specified with the second argument The commands and states are unique to the attached probe type Only certain VPI probes support this command See the probe documentation for how to set
103. 2 264 T TEKSecure 2 265 TIME 2 266 TOTaluptime 2 266 TRG 2 267 Trigger Command Group 2 36 TRIGger 2 267 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 269 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 270 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 270 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 271 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 272 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 272 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 273 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 273 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 274 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 274 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 275 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 275 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 276 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 276 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 277 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition 2 277 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue 2 278 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier 2 278 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe 2 279 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Index TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue 2 279 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 280 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue 2 281 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition 2 281 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe 2 282 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue 2 282 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX
104. 2 5 Command Syntax Cursor Position Mnemonics Math Specifier Mnemonics 2 6 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Channel Mnemonics Reference Waveform Mnemonics When cursors are displayed commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use Table 2 5 Channel Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CH lt x gt A channel specifier lt x gt is 1 through 4 Table 2 6 Cursor Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CURSOR lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 POSITION lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 HPOS lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 7 Math Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning Math lt x gt A math waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header Up to four automated measurements may be displayed Table 2 8 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning MEAS lt x gt A measurement specifier lt x gt is 1 through 4 Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 9 Reference Waveform Mnemonics Symbol Meaning REF lt x gt A reference waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 2 3 or 4 for 4 channel oscilloscopes and 1 or 2 for 2 channel oscilloscopes DPO3000 Series
105. 214 indicating that data point 214 is the first waveform data point that will be transferred DATA START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10 Sets or returns the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe query This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms from the oscilloscope Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the DATa STOP value As record length is varied the DATa STOP value must be explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted In other words curve results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if the distance from DATa STARt to DATa STOP stays smaller than the increased record length Waveform Transfer DATa STOP lt NR1 gt DATa STOP CURVe DATa DATa STARt WFMInpre NR_Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt lt NR1 gt is the last data point that will be transferred which ranges from to the record length If lt NR1 gt is greater than the record length then data will be transferred up to the record length If both DATa STARt and DATa STOP are greater than the record length the last data point in the record is returned DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is less than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query If you always want to transfer complete waveforms set DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the maximum record length or l
106. 3 7 Command Processing Without Using Synchronization To ensure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on the acquired data you can synchronize the program ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE re OO Processing Time Figure 3 8 Processing Sequence With Synchronization You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program WAI BUSY OPC and OPC Using the WAI Command The WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate an OPC message No commands after the WAI are processed before the OPC message s are generated 3 8 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The same command sequence using the WAI command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement WAI Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the oscilloscope but the commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope un
107. 3 V TRIGGER A LEVEL TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level which is 1 4 V TRIGger A LEVel AUXin Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port Trigger TRIGger A LEVel AUXin lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LEVel AUXin lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL trigger level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL trigger level of 1 4V TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN ECL sets the auxiliary input trigger level to 1 3 volts TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN might return TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN 0 0E 0 indicating the auxiliary input trigger level is 0 0 volts TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified channel Each channel can have an independent level Trigger TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL ECL TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 289 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 TRIGger A LOGIc Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands
108. 480P60 HD1080150 HD1080P25 HD1080160 HD1080PSF24 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Table 2 40 Available HDTV formats HDTV format Description 1080150 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 60 fps 1080i60 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 50 fps 1080p24 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 24 fps 1080p25 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 25 fps 1080sf24 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive sF 24 fps DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 40 Available HDTV formats cont HDTV format Description 720p60 750 lines 720 active 1280 x 720 pixel progressive 60 fps 480p60 525 lines 480 active 640 or 704 x 480 pixel progressive 60 fps TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Conditions Group Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt argument is a real number from 0 0 to 8 5 in increments of 0 5 The argument sets the number of fields that the oscilloscope waits before rearming the video trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD might return TRIGger A VIDeo HOLdoff FIELD 5 indicatin
109. 76 5C 92 7C 124 115 TA13 135 TA29 175 SA29 M 4D 77 5D 93 7D 125 116 TA14 136 TA30 176 SA30 N 4E 78 5E 94 7E 126 117 TA15 137 UNT 177 o RUBOUT 4F 79 SF 95 DEL y TALK SECONDARY ADDRESSES ADDRESSES OR COMMANDS Tektronix REF ANSI STD X3 4 1977 IEEE STD 488 1 1987 ISO STD 646 2973 A 1 Appendix A Character Set A 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix B Reserved Words CAL CLS DDT ESE ESR IDN LRN OPC PSC PUD RCL RST SAV SRE STB TRG TST WAI 1CH A ABORt ABOrt ABSolute AC ACKMISS ACQ ACQLENGTH ACQuire ACTIVeprinter ADD ADDR1O ADDR7 ADDRANDDATA ADDRess ADDress ADVanced ALIas ALL ALLEV ALLFields ALLLines ALTERNATE ALWAYS AMP1itude AND ANY This is a list of reserved words for your instrument Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling APPKey AREa ASCII ASCII ASC i ASSIgn ATRIGger AUTO AUTOSet AUTOZero AUX AUXOut AUXin AVErage Auto B B1 B2 B3 B4 BACKLight BACKWards BANdwi dth BASE BDIFFBP BINary BITRate BIT_Nr BLAckmanharris BM BMP BN_Fmt BOTh BOX BTRIGger BURSt BUS BUSY BY BYPass BYT_Nr BYT_Or CALibrate CAN CANH CANL DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual CARea CATalog CH CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHannel CHecksum CLASS CLEAR CLEARMenu CLEARSNapshot CLEar CLOCK CLOCk CMEan COLUMN COMMAND CONDi tion CONTRO CONTinue COPy COUNt COUP ling CPU CR
110. A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE SYNC PARI ty CHecksum HEADertime RESPtime FRAMetime SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE SYNC specifies a sync error type PARI ty specifies a parity error type CHecksum specifies a checksum error type HEADertime specifies a header time error type RESPtime specifies a response time error type RAMetime specifies a frame time error type SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating a SYNC error type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue 2 234 Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue lt Qstring gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue lt QString gt is a quoted string specifying the binary address string to be used for LIN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicating the binary address is undefined SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Argu
111. AL MAG DB WINDOW HANNING Sets or returns the current math function as a text string Dual math is defined if the string is of the form lt wfm gt lt operation gt lt wfm gt where the lt wfm gt s are any combination of live channels or reference waveforms lt operation gt is any of or and the MATH 1 TYPe is DUAL DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 163 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 164 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments FFT math is defined if the string is in the form FFT lt wfm gt where lt wfm gt is any live channel or reference waveform and the MATH 1 TYPe is FFT Advanced math is defined if the contents of the string can be parsed by the advanced math parser without errors and the MATH 1 TYPe is ADVanced On the front panel the Dual Wfm Math FFT and Advanced Math menus contain controls that allow building equivalent math expressions to those described above Math MATH 1 DEFine lt QString gt MATH 1 DEFine MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 TYPe lt QString gt quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the waveform Table 2 38 Advanced Math expression elements Expression Description CH1 CH4 REF1 REF4 Specifies a waveform data source FFT INTG DIFF Executes a Fast Fourier Transform integration or differentiation operation on the expression that follows The FFT operator must be the first left most operato
112. ARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard ExXTended SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies an 11 bit identifier field EXTended specifies a 29 bit identifier field DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 227 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN Dentifier ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for a CAN trigger search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt bin gt is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies
113. ARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 242 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns whether the clock edge is a rising or falling for a logic search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the clock source definition for a logic trigger search lt x gt is the search number If a clock source is defined then the logic search is determined by the state of the other inputs at the clock transition If no clock source is defined then the logic search is determined only by the state of the inputs Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SoUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF NONe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies a channel input as the clock source where lt x gt 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the clock source REF specifies the reference waveform as the clock source NONE specifies no clock source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or retu
114. ARDCopy ACTIVeprinter Sets or returns the currently active printer HARDCopy INKSaver Changes hard copy output to print color traces and graticule on a white background HARDCopy LAYout Sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy HARDCopy PREVIEW Previews the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied HARDCopy PRINTer ADD Adds a network printer to the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer DELete Removes a network printer from the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Returns the list of currently attached printers HARDCopy PRINTer REName Renames a network printer in the list of available printers DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 21 Command Groups Mark Command Group Horizontal Command Group Use the commands in the Horizontal Command Group to control the oscilloscope time bases You can set the time per division of the main time base You can also use the Horizontal commands to set the scale horizontal position and reference of the time base Table 2 22 Horizontal Commands Command Description HORizontal Returns settings for the horizontal commands HORizontal ACQLENGTH Returns the record length HORizontal DELay MODe Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal delay time HORizontal MAIn Returns settings for the horizontal main time base HORizontal MAIn SA
115. Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for all single source measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform where y is 1 REF lt x gt is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 MATH1 specifies Math 1 as the measurement 2 source MEASUREMENT MEASL SOURCE1 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE 1 MATH1 indicating that Math1 is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Sets or returns the reference source to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 185 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Source and reference Source2 source Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 MEASUrement MEAS lt x
116. B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 224 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 224 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 225 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 226 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 227 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 227 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TY Pe 2 228 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 229 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 230 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 230 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition 2 231 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue 2 232 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier 2 232 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe 2 233 SEARCH
117. B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the B trigger level for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each Channel can have an independent Level Trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the B edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the B edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Used in Runt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 325 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments TRIGger B STATE 2 326 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples and Slew Rate triggers as the lower threshold Used for all other Trigger Types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 g
118. BUS B lt X gt RS232C TX SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce Arguments CH1 CH4 specifies the channel to use as the RS232 TX source BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Group Bus DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 77 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity FALL RISe BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BU
119. C CAN SPI and RS232 There are up to four serial buses B1 B4 depending on your instrument model Each can be independently set to one of the serial trigger types The serial parameters related to the trigger are broken into two sections Trigger A SERIAL xxx consisting of parameters the user will change frequently and BUS B1 xxx consisting of parameters the user will specify once bus definition Requires a DPO3AUTO DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS I2C SPI CAN RS232 TRIGger A BUS I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Requires a DPO3AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition SOF FRAMEtype IDenti fier DATA IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS ERROR TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF enables triggering on the start of frame FRAMEtype enables triggering on the type of frame IDentifier enables triggering on a matching identifier DATA enables triggering on matching data IDANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 269 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples EOF enables triggering on the end of frame ACKM
120. CH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the source waveform for a PULSEWidth SOUrce pulse search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the condition for generating PULSEWidth WHEn a pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a PULSEWidth WIDth pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Sets or returns the condition setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A RUNT Sets or returns the width setting for a runt WIDth search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a SETHold CLOCk EDGE setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock source setting for SETHold CLOCk SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for SETHold CLOCk THReshold an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the data source setting for SETHold DATa SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Sets or returns t
121. Cent MID lt x gt 2 199 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 2 198 MEASUrement REFLevel 2 192 MEASUrement SNAPShot 2 199 MEASUrement STATIstics 2 199 MEASUrement STATIstics MODE 2 199 MEASUrement STATIstics WEI ghting 2 200 MEASUrement 2 170 MEASUrement GATing 2 171 MEASUrement IMMed 2 172 MEASUrement METHod 2 191 MESSage 2 201 MESSage BOX 2 201 MESSage CLEAR 2 202 MESSage SHOW 2 202 MESSage STATE 2 205 Miscellaneous Command Group 2 28 N NEWpass 2 205 O OPC 2 206 p PASSWord 2 207 PSC 2 207 PUD 2 208 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual R RCL 2 208 RECAIL SETUp 2 209 RECAII WAVEform 2 210 REF lt x gt DATE 2 211 REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe 2 211 REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 211 REF lt x gt LABel 2 212 REF lt x gt TIMe 2 212 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 212 REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle 2 213 REF lt x gt 2 210 REM 2 214 RST 2 214 S SAV 2 215 Save and Recall Command Group 2 29 SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt 2 216 SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat 2 217 SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat 2 219 SAVe WAVEform GATIng 2 220 SAVe ASSIgn TYPe 2 215 SAVe IMAGe 2 216 SAVe IMAGe LAYout 2 217 SAVe SETUp 2 217 SAVe WAVEform 2 218 Search Commands Group 2 31 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy 2 222 SEARCH SEARCHK lt x gt STATE 2 222 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 223 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS
122. D indicates the degauss operation failed RUNNING indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Group Syntax 2 94 Sets or returns the range of a Tek VPI probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number NOTE This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Returns CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt specifies the range which is probe specific This command returns 0 0 for probes that do no support forced range Sets or returns the gain factor for the probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number The gain of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio For example a common 10x probe has a gain of 0 1 Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt is the probe gain Allowed values depend on the specific probe CH2 PROBE GAIN might return CH2 PROBE GAIN 0 1000 00 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0 1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input CH lt x gt PRObe ID Query Only Group Syntax Exam
123. DATa SIZe 2 282 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue 2 283 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 283 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 284 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue 2 284 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue 2 284 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 285 TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 2 286 TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 286 TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 287 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe 2 288 TRIGger A LEVel AUXin 2 289 TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt 2 289 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss 2 290 TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 291 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 292 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 293 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 293 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut 2 292 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime 2 294 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 294 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 295 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 295 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern 2 293 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 296 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 297 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX 2 297 TRIGger A PULse CLAss 2 298 TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 299 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 2 300 TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn 2 300 TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 301 TRIGger A PULSEWIDth 2 299 Index 7 Index TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 302 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 302 TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 304 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 305 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 305 TRIGger A SET
124. DELTatime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime lt NR3 gt is a floating point value with exponent that sets the pattern trigger time value This argument has a range of 39 6E 9 39 6 ns to 10 0E0 10 s in increments of 13 2 ns Values that are not an increment of 13 2 ns are rounded to the nearest correct value TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 71 28E 8 sets the pattern trigger delta time value to 712 8 ns TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Group Syntax Arguments 2 294 Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEnN TRUe FALSe LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn TRUE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes true FALSE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes false LESSTHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period less than the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MORETHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period more greater than the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME EQUAL triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME within a 5 tolerance UNEQUAL trigg
125. DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1L RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 1 TYPE FREQUENCY UNITS Hz SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0 000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 1 TYPE PERIOD UNITS s SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 STATE 1 TYPE PK2PK UNITS V SOURCEL CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 STATE O TYPE PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT METHOD AUTO REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 mID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOw 10 0000 mMID1 50 0000 mID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF NUMHORZ 0 NUMVERT 0 HORZ1 99 0000E 36 HORZ2 99 0000E 36 HORZ3 99 0000E 36 HORZ4 99 0000E 36 VERTL 99 0000E 36 VERT2 99 0000E 36 VERT3 99 0000E 36 VERT4 99 0000E 36 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE OF
126. DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual VVO OU A O TN Tektronix 071 2421 00 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual www tektronix com Tektronix 071 2421 00 7 Copyright Tektronix All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support In North America call 1 800 833 9200 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Table of Contents Getting Started c csccccuwedacihdvntadetwuana eyed svueueed NNE AS O E 544 cnaeaea Sulewaleuaee den duenaun eee 1 1 Setting Up Remote Communications 0 ccc ccce eee eee ne ene e eee eee eee eae n eaten ennaes 1 1 Command Syntax ic cecge erage suver se idancedepnnesaegeuhinndadedgdo mens hedud es staviuedsrtnncesGeber de daddentes nnd 2 1 Command and Query Structure 2 0 0 ccc cece ene nee ne nnn n Ene enn EEE nnn EEE 2 1 Clearing the oscilloscope 0 cece cece enn EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE
127. DTH might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH 2 0000E 09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input data voltage threshold and source and both setup and hold times for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOI1d TRIGGER A SETHOLD might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 100 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 80 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 20 0000E 9 SETTIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Query Only 2 304 Returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCK TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE EXT EDGE FALL THRESHOLD 1 4000 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOId CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk EDGE FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge TRIG
128. EEE EEE 2 3 Command ENY seeren e E REEE acideaat Masa E EEEE EE easier EAE Er 2 3 Constructed Mnemonics sserccrsiriss bees eire si titros tto EEEE EAEE EE EEEE EEEE Eea 2 5 Arment TYPE Sirane o NE OE E E arenes E AAE 2 7 Command Groups soi esccosranducdeeracdeaenehed Mana aa a a a N ainra 2 11 Acquisition Command Group 0 ccce cece cece eee ence eee erres nee eee e nets nent ena eenae eas 2 11 Alias Command Group ccc cece cece enn nnn EEE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE 2 12 Bus Command Group e scscs diese e aenn e sseasnatinbouiadddusas AON O ANN E ENEA 2 13 Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group sssssesessssesrrrrerrerrrerrrerrrrerrrrrrrerrr 2 16 Cursor Command Group easerecir esini t onnaa EE E EN RAE E EEEE KEEN N 2 17 Display Command Gro Pisecrnssvssesiiann iisi eenn e NEEE EE AAN EENE 2 18 Ethernet Command Group ieisssssaccseaesdete res i n E E E E EE E AEE S E E A 2 19 File System Command Gro p eesse ess Ee a EEEE EEEE E EEE NES 2 20 Hard Copy Command Group nesese recciinncsanre dnnt E EN E E ARANE E NAE E 2 21 Horizontal Command Group essees sesers sese ence enn enn EEE Een EEE eae EEE ES 2 22 Mark Command Grousser serii nn dense E E E EE EEE E EEEE 2 22 Math Command Group isccdssccsscesahid na n E Eaa N O aS 2 24 Measurement Command Group ssssssssse seese srssrsersessrresrssesersrssrsrrsrrsrsersrnt 2 25 Miscellaneous Command Group c cece cece ence een eee cnet ence enn e eee tne teat
129. ER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN specifies that the duration of the A pulse will fall within defined high and low limits TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN THAN indicating the conditions for generating a width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn lt NR3 gt specifies the pulse width in seconds TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 5 0E 6 sets the pulse width to 5 us TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 indicating that the pulse width is set to 2 ns TRIGger A RUNT Query Only Group Returns the current A runt trigger parameters Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 301 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Examples TRIGger A RUNT TRIGGER A RUNT might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A RUNT POLarity POSi tive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing
130. ER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV TRIGger A VIDeo Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the A trigger video parameters Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo TRIGGER A VIDEO might return TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC SYNC ALLLINES HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE SCANRATE15K TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 HDTV FORMAT HD1080160 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 313 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video trigger format Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE INTERLAced PROGressive TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE INTERLACed argument sets the format for interlaced video lines PROGressive argument sets the format for progressive video lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE sets the custom format for the A video trigger to progressive lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED indicating that interlaced is selected as the custom format for the A video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod
131. ESSEQual EQual TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUAL1 fier LeESSThan sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value Than sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is than the qualifier value EQUa1 sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value UNEQua sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier value LESSEQua sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than or equal to the qualifier value EQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is than or equal to the qualifier value TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER THAN indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger when the data is than the qualifier value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes for a CAN trigger if the condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in bytes DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 271 Commands
132. EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope LINE specifies AC line voltage TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the pulse width source TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Group Syntax Related Commands 2 300 Sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse that meets falls outside or within the specified range of limits Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth wWHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSEWidth W1IDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGG
133. EnN MORELimit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 10 0E 00 sets the minimum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 0000E 9 indicating that the selected pattern must hold true for at least 8 ns to generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 296 This command sets or queries the logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel specified by x Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 3 0E 3 sets the A logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 2 to 3 mV TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 might return TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 1 2000E 00 indicating that the A logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 3 is 1 2 V DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the lower thre
134. F WEIGHTING 32 MEASUREMENT GATING SCREEN MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot No Query Form Removes the measurement snapshot display Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot Related Commands CLEARMenu MEASUrement GATing Specifies or returns the measurement gating setting Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement GATing OFF SCREen CURSor MEASUrement GATing DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 171 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples OFF turns off measurement gating full record SCREen turns on gating using the left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR turns on measurement gating using the cursors as limits MEASUREMENT GATING might return MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors MEASUrement IMMed Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters Measurement MEASUrement IMMed MEASUREMENT IMMED might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUrement IMMed DELay Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 172 Returns information about the immediate delay measurement This command i
135. F or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the search state to off ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the search state to on DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns the total number of matches for the search The total number of matches may be than the number of marks placed lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TOTAL lt NR1 gt is the total number of matches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Query Only Conditions Group Syntax Returns Returns the serial search type lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 There are four serial buses B1 through B4 This command requires a DPO3AUTO or DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Group Syntax Queries the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS settings Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 223 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION SS
136. FTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV INFINITE NUMAVG 16 SAMPLINGMODE RT HEADER 1 LOCK NONE LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERBOSE 1 ALTAS STATE 03 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0000 CLOCK 1 GRATICULE FULL INTENSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH HARDCOPY INKSAVER OFF LAYOUT LANDSCAPE PREVIEW 0 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT BMP SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE ASSIGN TYPE SETUP TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X3 CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X3 CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 Q0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SETUP lt x gt DATE Query Only Group Syntax Examples SETUP lt x gt LABEL Group Syntax Arguments Exa
137. GE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE indicating the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 285 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOITSErej TRIGger A EDGE COUPling TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe DC specifies DC trigger coupling which passes all input signals to the trigger circuitry HFRej specifies high frequency rejection coupling which attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry LFRej specifies low frequency rejection coupling which attenuates signals below 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry NOISErej specifies noise rejection coupling which provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but may require greater trigger signal amplitude TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands 2 286 Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger
138. GER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger Bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the size of the data string in bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Group Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Bus DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 279 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALUue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the LIN trigger data value TRIGGER A BUS B1L LIN DATA VALUE 11001101 sets the data value to 11001101 TRIGGER A BUS BL LIN DATA VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS BL LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 280 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the error type be used for LIN trigger Bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRT
139. GER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE indicating that polarity is specified as the clock rising edge TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns the clock source for the setup and hold triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOIld CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 AUX EXT TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SoUrce TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 305 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples CH1 CH4 specifies the input channel number AUX or EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux Input connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock input for setup and hold input TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup and hold trigger input TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHOI1d CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset TTL value of 1 4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER
140. H lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1 REF lt X gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the reference channel number MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE 1 MATH1 specifies Math as the immediate measurement source DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 CH3 indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Source1 and reference Source2 source Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1 REF lt X gt is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 REF3 sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the delay to source when making delay measurements MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 MATH1 indicating that Math1 is the immedi
141. H2 X CH3 X CH4 X MA TH X REF1 X REF2 X REF3 X REF4 X CLOC SOU NONE EDGE RIS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI PAT INP CH1 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 221 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order X CH 2 X CH3 X CH4 X MATH X REF1 X REF2 X REF3 X REF4 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI PAT WHE TRU WHE LESSL 8 Q0000E 9 L 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A PULSEW SOU CH1 POL POS WHE LESS WID 8 0000E 9 SEA RCH SEARCH1 TRIG A RUNT SOU CH1 POL POS WHE OCCURS WID 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A TRAN SOU CH1 POL POS WHE SLOW DELT 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A SETH CLOC SOU CH1 EDGE RIS THR 0 0000 SEARC H SEARCH1 TRIG A SETH DAT SOU CH2 THR 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A SETH HOLDT 8 0000E 9 SETT 8 0000 E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 STATE 0 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to a search lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy SEARCHtotrigger TRIGgertosearch SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE 2 222 Group Syntax Arguments Sets the search state to on or off lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 The query form returns the search state Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt STATE OF
142. H3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X3 CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 MO RELIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 000 OE 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 0 0000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLD TIME 4 0000E 9 SETTIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN SLOWER DELTATIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC SYNC ALLLINES HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE SCAN RATE15K TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 H DTV FORMAT HD1080160 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B1 B1 I12C CONDITION START DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SIZE 1 START 0 0000 DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TYPE USER VALUE XXXXXXX 5 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION MOST DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX 3 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX 5 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 START 0 0000 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A BUS Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the trigger type I2
143. HReshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold REF lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold REF lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 247 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all channel searches that use a lower threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL
144. Hold CLOCk THReshold 2 306 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk 2 304 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 307 TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 307 TRIGger A SETHold DATa 2 306 TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 308 TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 308 TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt 2 309 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 313 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod 2 314 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN 2 315 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCInterval 2 315 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE 2 314 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat 2 316 TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD 2 317 TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 2 317 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity 2 318 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce 2 319 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard 2 319 TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD 2 320 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 310 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 310 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 311 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 311 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall 2 309 TRIGger B EDGE COUPling 2 322 TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe 2 322 TRIGger B EDGE SOUtrce 2 323 TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 324 TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt 2 325 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 325 TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 328 TRIGger EXTernal PRObe 2 328 TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts 2 329 TRIGger A 2 267 TRIGger A BUS 2 269 TRIGger A EDGE 2 285 TRIGger A HOLDoff 2 287 TRIGger A LEVel 2 288 TRIGger A LOGIc 2 290 Index 8 TRIGger A MODe 2 298 TRIGger A
145. Horizontal Delay Mode is on this command stores a new horizontal position that is used when Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off Horizontal HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt HORi zontal POSition lt NR3 gt is the horizontal position expressed as the percentage of the waveform displayed left of the center of the graticule HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 sets the horizontal position to 50 HORIZONTAL POSITION might return HORIZONTAL POSITION 100 indicating that the horizontal position is set to 100 HORizontal PREViewstate Query Only Group Syntax Returns 2 154 Returns a boolean value to indicate whether the acquisition system is in the preview state Horizontal HOR1 zontal PREViewstate lt NR1 gt if the acquisition system is in the preview state lt NR1 gt 0 if the acquisition system is not in the preview state DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal RECOrdlength Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length Horizontal HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR1 gt HOR1 zontal RECOrdlength lt NR1 gt represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths which are 1000 10000 100000 1000000 or 5000000 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be acquired for
146. IGger A LEVel MATH Sets or returns the math waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Sets or returns the logic operator for the logic search Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns whether the clock edge is rise or fall for a logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source definition for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn SEARCH
147. IGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary input TRIGger A MODe Sets or returns the A trigger mode TRIGger A PULse Returns the A pulse trigger parameters TRIGger A PULse CLAss Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Returns the trigger A pulse width parameters TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Sets or returns the criteria for width specification of pulse width trigger events TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A RUNT Returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic parameters TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a runt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the minimum width for A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A SETH
148. ISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0000 CLOCK 1 GRATICULE FULL INTENSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH HARDCOPY INKSAVER OFF LAYOUT LANDSCAPE PREVIEW 0 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT BMP SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE ASSIGN TYPE SETUP TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LE VEL 20 Q0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGG ER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A H OLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0 000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 0 0000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 4 0000E 9 SETTIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 T
149. ISS enables triggering on a missing acknowledge ERROR specifies a search based on a bit stuffing error TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file condition TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching CAN data TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the CAN trigger data direction to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This applies only if the trigger condition is ID Requires a DPO3AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ sets the CAN data direction to READ WRITE sets the CAN data direction to WRITE NOCARE sets the CAN data direction to either TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data direction to Write TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group 2 270 Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This applies only if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Requires a DPO3AUTO application module Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual L
150. Idth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 177 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples PEDGECount is the count of rising edges PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHASe measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle PK2Pk peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x 100 PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses PwIdth positive
151. L DELAY MODE OFF indicating that the Horizontal Delay Mode is off and that the horizontal position command operates like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel HORizontal DELay TIMe Group Sets or returns the horizontal delay time The amount of time the acquisition is delayed depends on sample rate and record length Horizontal DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 151 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples HOR1zontal DELay TIMe lt NR3 gt HORi zontal DELay TIMe NR3 is the delay in seconds HORi zontal DELay TIME 0 3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs HORizontal MAIn Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns settings for the horizontal main time base Horizontal HORi zontal MAIn HORIZONTAL MAIN might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 4 0000E 6 SAMPLERATE 250 0000E 6 UNITS S UNITS STRING s HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 152 Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate Horizontal HORi zontal MAIn SAMPLERate HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR3 gt specifies the sample rate in seconds HORIZONTAL MAIN SAMPLERATE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SAMPLERATE 2 5000E 09 indicating that the sample rate is currently set to 2 5 GS s DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphab
152. L TOTal TOTaluptime TRACK TRADitionalchinese TRANSition TRAnsition TRIGger TRIGgertosearch TRUe TTL TURN Twenty Twofifty TX TXDATA TXENDPacket B 4 TXRX TXSTArt TYPE TYPe Than UNDO UNEQual UNIts UNLock UPPerthreshold USE USER vix V2X VALue VAR VBArs VDELTa VERBose VERT VERTical VIDeo VOLts WAKEup WAVEform WAVFrm WEIghting WFId WFMInpre WFMOutpre WHEn wiIDth WINdow WRITE WRITEFi le xX XDELta XFF XINcr XUNit XY XZEro Y YDELta YES YMUlt YOFf YT YUNItS YUNit YUNItS YZEro ZOOM zoom DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Index A ACQuire MAXSamplerate 2 53 ACQuire 2 53 ACQuire MODe 2 53 ACQuire NUMACq 2 55 ACQuire NUMAVsg 2 55 ACQuire STATE 2 56 ACQuire STOPA fter 2 56 Acquisition Command Group 2 11 Alias Command Group 2 12 ALIas 2 57 ALIas STATE 2 60 ALIas CATalog 2 58 ALlIas DEFine 2 58 ALlas DELEte 2 59 ALlIas DELEte NAMe 2 60 ALlIas DELEte ALL 2 59 ALLEv 2 60 AUTOSet 2 61 AUXin PRObe AUTOZero 2 62 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 63 AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange 2 64 AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber 2 64 AUXin PRObe ID TYPE 2 64 AUXin PRObe RESistance 2 65 AUXin 2 61 AUXin PRObe 2 62 AUXin PRObe COMMAND 2 62 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss 2 63 AUXin PRObe GAIN 2 64 AUXin PRObe SIGnal 2 65 AUXin PRObe UNIts 2 65 B BUS 2 66 BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate 2 66 BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe 2 67 BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint 2 68 BUS B lt
153. MEASUrement REFLevel MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL might return these reference level settings MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 mID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 192 Group Syntax Sets or returns the high reference level and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe lt NR3 gt is the high reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 71 sets the high reference level to 1 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute _LOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the low reference level and is
154. MPLERate Sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired number of samples per second Or returns the current horizontal sample rate HORizontal MAIn SCAle Sets or returns the main time base horizontal scale HORizontal MAIn UNIts Returns the units for the horizontal main time base HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Sets or returns the units string for the horizontal main time base HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position HORizontal PREViewstate Returns whether or not the acquisition system is in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame Or returns the current horizontal record length HORizontal RESOlution Sets or returns the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame HORizontal SAMPLERate Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale Use the commands in the Mark Command Group to identify areas of the acquired waveform that warrant further investigation DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 23 Mark Commands Command Groups Command Description MARK Move to the next or previous mark on the waveform or returns all learnable settings from the mark commands MARK CREATE Creates a mark on a particular waveform or all waveforms in a column MARK DELEte Deletes a
155. NCdg Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the location of waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope DATa STARt Sets or returns the starting point in waveform transfer DATa STOP Sets or returns the ending data point in waveform transfer WAVFrm Returns a branch query containing waveform data in either binary or ASCII format waveform formatting data and the location of the waveform data source WFMInpre Returns the waveform formatting specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVE command data WFMInpre BIT_Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BN_Fmt Sets or returns the format of binary data for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points for the incoming waveform WFMInpre ENCdg Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data WFMInpre NR_Pt Sets or returns the number of points in the incoming waveform record WFMInpre PT_Fmt Sets or returns the point format of incoming waveform data WFMInpre PT_Off This query always returns a 0 WFMInpre XINcr Sets or returns the horizontal sampling interval between incoming waveform points WFMInpre XUNit Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform WFMInpre XZE
156. O3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments ESE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ESR Query Only Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the dots only display OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the dots only display Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register STB For a detailed discussion on how to use registers see Registers Status and Error ESE lt NR1 gt ESE CLS DESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB lt NR1 gt specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value which ranges from 0 through 255 The power on default for the ESER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the ESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the DESE command to set the DESER ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits ESE might return 186 showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010 Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR reading the SESR clears it For a detailed discussion on how to use registers see Registers S
157. ONTAL POSITION 50 0000 indicating that the Zoom reference pointer is currently set at 50 of acquired waveform ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the zoom horizontal scale factor for the specified zoom where x is the integer representing the single zoom window lt x gt can only be 1 Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HOR1 zontal SCAle lt NR3 gt is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1 2 5 increments ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 sets the horizontal scale to 5 seconds ZOOM ZOOM2 HORIZONTAL SCALE might return ZOOM2 HORIZONTAL SCALE 1 indicating that the horizontal scale is 1 second ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition Group Syntax Arguments Sets the horizontal position of the zoom box in terms of 0 to 100 0 of upper window lt x gt can only be 1 Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSi tion lt NR3 gt is the horizontal position as a percent of the upper window DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 353 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale of the zoom box lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax ZO0Om ZOOM lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the horizontal scale of the zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Sets or returns the s
158. OOP OPTION NTIMES might return DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 5 indicating the self test loop is set to run five times DIAg LOOP STOP No Query Form Stops the self test at the end of the current loop DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 121 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples DIAg RESUIt FLAg Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP STOP DIAG LOOP STOP stops the self test at the end of the current loop Query Only Returns the pass fail status from the last self test sequence execution Use this query to determine which test s has failed Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg RESU1t FLAg DIAg RESUIt LOG PASS indicates that all of the selected self diagnostic tests have passed FAIL indicates that at least one of the selected self diagnostic tests has failed DIAG RESULT FLAG returns either DIAG RESULT FLAG PASS or FALL DIAg RESUIt LOG Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns 2 122 Returns the internal results log from the last self test sequence execution The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass fail status of each Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg RESU1t LOG DIAg RESUIt FLAg lt QString gt in the following format lt Status gt lt Module name gt lt Status gt lt Module name gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Comman
159. OUrce 2 251 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 251 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 252 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 252 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 253 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 253 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 253 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 254 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 254 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 255 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe 2 257 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 257 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 258 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 258 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 255 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 255 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 256 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 256 SEARCH 2 221 SELect 2 258 SELect BUS lt x gt 2 259 SELect CH lt x gt 2 259 SELect REF lt x gt 2 261 SELect CONTROI 2 260 SELect MATH 1 2 260 SET 2 262 SETUP lt x gt DATE 2 263 SETUP lt x gt LABEL 2 263 SETUP lt x gt TIME 2 263 SRE 2 264 Status and Error Command Group 2 35 STB
160. Only Returns the polar radius for the specified cursor where x can be either or 2 2 108 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts Query Only Returns the polar radius units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta Query Only Returns the XY cursor polar angle delta Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate where x is either or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor coordinate units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar THETA UNItS DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 109 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta Query Only Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position The AX x AY value is calculated as X2 X1 x Y2 Y1 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X x Y cursor measurement Position 1 X1 x Y1 Position 2 X2 x Y2 The cursor is specified by x which can be 1 or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x g
161. Outpre BYT_Or Setting the DATa ENGdg value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and conversley NOTE This command and query does not apply to incoming waveform data Waveform Transfer DATa ENCdg ASCIi FAStest RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary SRPbinary DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN_Fmt WFMOutpre BYT_Or ASCTi specifies the ASCII representation for waveform data points If ASCII is the value then BN_Fmt and BYT_Or are ignored DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 115 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DATa SOUrce 2 116 FAStest specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce RIBINARY specifies signed integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT_Nr is 1 the range is from 128 through 127 When BYT_Nr is 2 the range is from 32 768 through 32 767 Center screen is 0 zero The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen This is the default argument RPBinary specifies the positive integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT_Nr is 1 the range from 0 through 255 When BYT_Nr is 2 the range is from 0 to 65 535 The center of the screen is 127 The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit
162. PADDRESS 128 196 13 352 sets the Dns IP address that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet DOMAINname Sets or returns the network domain name Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet DOMAINname lt Qstri ng gt ETHERnet DOMAINname Arguments lt QString gt is the network domain name enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET DOMAINNAME Alphal Mycorp com sets the domain name that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet ENET ADDress Query Only Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet ENET ADDress Examples ETHERNET ENET ADDRESS returns an Ethernet address such as 08 00 11 01 02 03 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address Group Ethernet DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 131 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet HTTPPort Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments 2 132 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress lt QString gt ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET GATEWAY IPADDRESS 128 143 16 1 sets the gateway IP address Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value Ethernet ETHERnet HTTPPort lt Qstring gt ETHERnet HTTPPo
163. Programmer Manual Command Syntax Argument Types Numeric Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments The syntax shows the format that the oscilloscope returns in response to a query This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the oscilloscope though any of the formats will be accepted This documentation represents these arguments as described below Table 2 10 Numeric Arguments Symbol Meaning lt NR1 gt Signed integer value lt NR2 gt Floating point value without an exponent lt NR3 gt Floating point value with an exponent lt bin gt Digital data in binary format Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting by either rounding or truncating when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description Quoted String Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote or double quote The following is an example of a quoted string This is a quoted string This documentation represents these arguments as follows Table 2 11 Quoted String Argument Symbol Meaning lt QString gt Quoted string of ASCII text DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 7 Command Syntax 2 8 Block A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Follow these rules when you use quoted strings 1 Use the same type o
164. RIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH1 MARK Moves to the next or previous reference mark on the waveform Returns the current mark position Group Mark Syntax MARK NEXT PREVious MARK Arguments NEXT moves to the next reference mark on the right PREVious moves to the next reference mark on the left MARK CREATE No Query Form Creates a mark on a specified waveform or all waveforms in a column Group Mark Syntax MARK CREATE CH lt x gt MATH B lt x gt REF lt X gt COLUMN Arguments CH lt x gt creates the mark on a channel waveform where lt x gt is the channel number MATH creates the mark on the math waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 159 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order B lt x gt creates the mark on a bus waveform where lt x gt is the bus number REF lt x gt creates the mark on a reference waveform where lt x gt is the reference waveform number COLUMN creates marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column MARK DELEte No Query Form Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column the selected mark or all marks Group Mark Syntax MARK DELEte CH lt X gt MATH B lt X gt REF lt X gt COLUMN Arguments CH lt X gt deletes the mark on a channel waveform where lt x gt is the channel number MATH deletes the mark on the math waveform B lt x gt deletes the mark on a bus waveform where lt x gt is the bus number REF lt x gt deletes t
165. ROI Sets or returns the waveform that is selected as the implied recipient of channel related commands SELect MATH 1 Turns on or off the math waveform or returns whether the math waveform is on or off SELect REF lt x gt Turns on or off the specified reference waveform or returns whether the specified reference waveform is on or off DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Waveform Transfer Command Group Data Formats Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer waveform data points to and from the oscilloscope Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a waveform One data value usually represents one data point in the waveform record When working with envelope waveforms each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min max pair Before you transfer waveform data you must specify the data format record length and waveform source or destination All data points for DPO models are signed integer format only Valid data widths for CH1 CH4 MATH and REF1 REF4 are 1 and 2 byte widths The valid data widths for the digital collection is either 4 or 8 byte widths The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary format You specify the format with the DATa ENCdg command ASCII Data ASCII data is represented by signed integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified One byte wide data ranges from 128 to 127
166. S B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce 2 78 Sets or returns the SPI MISO source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH1 CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOST POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity LOW specifies the active low polarity HIGH specifies the active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source for bus lt x where x is the bus number gt This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH4 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source 2 79 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Conditions Group
167. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern search Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the channel threshold level for an logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all channel waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all math waveform searches DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 33 Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 34 Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all reference waveform searches SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search PULSEWidth POLarity SEARCH SEAR
168. SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER Use the DESE query to read the DESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 3 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The Event Status Enable Register ESER This register controls which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB in the SBR Use the ESE command to set the bits in the ESER Use the ESE query to read it 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 4 The Event Status Enable Register ESER The Service Request Enable Register SRER This register controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary MSS bit DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 3 3 Status and Events Queues 3 4 PSC Command Output Queue A Use the SRE command to set the SRER Use the SRE query to read the register The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESB MV Figure 3 5 The Service Request Enable Register SRER The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets
169. SUrement MMed SOUrce 2 175 MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 176 MEASUrement IMMed UNIts 2 178 MEASUrement IMMed VALue 2 179 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt 2 180 MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ 2 180 MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT 2 180 MEASUrement INDICators STATE 2 181 MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt 2 181 MEASUrement INDICators 2 179 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt 2 182 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection 2 183 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 183 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay 2 182 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum 2 184 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN 2 184 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum 2 185 Index 4 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 2 185 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt 2 186 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 185 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE 2 187 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev 2 187 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 2 188 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts 2 190 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue 2 191 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt 2 182 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 192 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 193 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 2 194 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt 2 195 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 2 194 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod 2 195 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 196 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW 2 197 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 2 197 MEASUrement REFLevel PER
170. Scope newfile txt if the current working directory is D TekScope File System FILESystem CwD lt new working directory path gt lt new working directory path gt is a quoted string that defines the current working a directory name can be up to 128 characters FILESYSTEM CwD D TekScope images sets the current working directory to images FILESYSTEM CwD might return FILESYSTEM CwD D TekScope waveforms indicating that the current working directory is set to Waveforms FILESystem DELEte No Query Form 2 138 Group Syntax Related Commands This command deletes a named file If you specify a directory name it will delete the directory and all of its contents the same as the RMDir command You can also specify the filename as to delete all of the files in the current or specified directory File System FILESystem DELEte lt file path gt FILESystem CWD FILESystem RMDir DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name The argument will delete all files and subdirectories within the current working directory FILESYSTEM DELETE NOT_MINE SET deletes the file named NOT_MINE SET from the current working directory FILESystem DIR Query Only Group Syntax Related Comma
171. Service manual located on the DPO3000 Documentation CD ROM in PDF format You can also order a printed copy Table 2 16 Calibration and Diagnostic Commands Command Description CAL Instructs the oscilloscope to perform self calibration and returns the oscilloscope self calibration status CALibrate FACtory STATus Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory CALibrate INTERNal Starts a signal path compensation CALibrate INTERNal STARt Starts the internal signal path calibration CALibrate INTERNal STATus Returns the current status of the internal signal path calibration CALibrate RESults Returns the status of all calibration subsystems without performing an SPC operation CALibrate RESults FACtory Returns the status of internal and factory calibration CALibrate RESults SPC Returns the results of the last SPC operation DIAg LOOP OPTion Sets the self test loop option DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Sets the self test loop option to run N times DIAg LOOP STOP Stops the self test at the end of the current loop DIAg RESUIt FLAg Returns the pass fail status from the last self test sequence execution DIAg RESUIt LOG Returns the internal results log from the last self test sequence execution DIAg SELect lt function gt Selects one of the available self test areas DIAg STATE Sets the oscilloscope operating state DIAg SELect Runs self t
172. T 4 HORZ1 7 5E0 HORZ2 3 400000095367E0 HORZ3 0 0E0 HORZ4 0 0E0 VERT1 6 351123E 6 VERT2 3 179753E 6 VERT3 6 40943E 6 VERT4 6 403E 6 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator lt x gt where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 Measurement MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 2 0E 3 indicating that horizontal indicator has a value of 2mV MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed Measurement MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ 2 indicating there are currently 2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule The indicators show where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Query Only 2 180 Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT 2 indicating there are currently 2 vertical lines drawn on the graticule The
173. TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALUe lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess VALue lt QString gt is up to 7 or 10 bits depending on the address mode that specifies the address The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1L 1I12C ADDRESS VALUE 1011 sets the I2C address value to XXX1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger condition for an I C trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATStart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition STARt specifies a search based on start condition STOP specifies a search based on stop condition REPEATStart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on address DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 275 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DATA specifies a search based on data ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START specifies start as the I C trigger condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DiRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the I C trigger ty
174. TRIGger A MODe TRIGger A LEVel AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period NORMa waits for a valid trigger event TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGGER A MODE might return TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL indicating that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGger A PULse Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the A pulse trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A PULSe TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A PULSE might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGger A PULse CLAss Group 2 298 Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A PULSe CLAsSs RUNt WIDth TRAnsition TRIGger A PULSe CLASS TRIGger A RUNT TRIGger A PULSEWIDth TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall TRIGger A TY Pe RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the specified time limits TRAnsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time b
175. T_Off PULSEWIDth PULSEWidth PULSe PULSe Pwidth QUALi fier RADIUS RATDELta RATE1LOOK RATE1OK RATE125K RATEL5K RATE1M RATE20K RATE250K RATE25K RATE33K RATE35K RATE37K RATE500K RATE50K RATE62K RATE800K RATE83K RATE92K RATIO RDELta READ READFile RECA11 RECOrdlength RECTX RECTY RECTangular REF REFL REF2 REF3 REF4 REFLevel REM REMote REName REPEATStart RESET RESOlution RESPtime RESUIt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix B Reserved Words RESistance RESults RI RIBinary RISEFal 1 RISe RISing RMDir RMS ROM RP RPBinary RS232 RS232C RUN RUNSTOp RUNT RUNt RUSSian RWINClude RX RXDATA RXENDPacket RXSTArt SAMPLERate SAMPLEpoint SAMp le SAVe SCAN SCAle SCLK SCREEN SCREen SDATA SEARCH SEARCHtotrigger SECAM SEConds SELect SELected SEQuence SERnumber SET SETHol1d SETLevel SETTime SETUP SETUP SHOW SIGnal SIMP1i1fiedchinese size SLEEP SLEWRate SLOWer SLOpe SMA11 SNAPShot SNAD SOF SOURCE SOURCE2 source source2 SPANish SPC SPECTral SPI SPREADSheet SPace SRIbinary SRPbinary SS STANDard STANdard START STARTup STARTupnosync START STARtbyte STATE STATIStics STATUS STATe STATIC STATUS STDdev STOP sToPAfter STRing STYle STandard SUBNETMask SYNC SYNCField SYNCFrame SYNCInterval TEKSecure TEMPerature TERmination TESTnumber THDELta THETA THREsShold THReshold TIFF B 3 Appendix B Reserved Words TIME TIMe TOTA
176. US B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue EQUal searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue UNEQual searches for bus data not equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue LESSEQual searches for bus data less equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 225 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EQual searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for a CAN search if the search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 226 Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt
177. VAL XXXXXXX 3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 CAN COND SOF FRAME DATA DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 D IR NOCARE QUAL EQU SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 CAN ID MOD ST VAL XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRI G A BUS B2 SPI COND SS DAT MOSI VAL XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 SPI DAT MISO VAL XXXXX XXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 SPI DAT SIZ 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 I2C COND STAR DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 I2C ADDR MOD ADDR7 TYP USER VAL XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 CAN COND SOF FRAME DATA DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE QUAL EQU SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 CAN ID MOD ST VAL XXXXXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIG A BUS SOU B1 SEA RCH SEARCH1 TRIG A TYP EDG LEV 0 0000 LEV CH1 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 RE F1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A UPP CH1 800 0000E 3 CH2 800 000 OE 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 MATH 800 0000E 3 REF1 800 0000E 3 REF2 800 0000E 3 REF3 800 000 OE 3 REF4 800 0000E 3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOW CH1 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH O 0000 REF1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A EDGE SOU CH1 SLO RIS SE ARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI FUNC AND THR CH1 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 REF1 O 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI INP CH1 X C
178. VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary data string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE 11001010 sets the high value to 11001010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier 2 278 Group Syntax Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQua l INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the LIN data qualifier to equal UNEQua sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal LESSEQua sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQua sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the data qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIG
179. Vert might return CH2 INVERT 0 indicating that channel 2 is not inverted Sets or returns the waveform label for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt CH lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alpha numeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for the channel lt x gt waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters Sets or returns the vertical offset for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This command offsets the vertical acquisition window moves the level at the vertical center of the acquisition window for the specified channel Visualize DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for increased offset values and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset values The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this control Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for channel waveforms to help determine what data is acquired The oscilloscope always displays the input signal minus the offset value The channel offset range depends on the vertical scale factor Table 2 34 Channel Offset Range Offset range ViDiv Setting 1 MQ Input 50 75 Q Input 1 mV div 50 mV div 1 V 1 V 50 5 mV div 99 5 mV div 0 5 V 0 5 V 100 mV div 50
180. Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Vertical DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 99 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CH lt x gt YUNits lt QString gt CH lt x gt YUNitS Arguments QString isa string of text surrounded by quotes specifying the supported units CLEARMenu No Query Form Clears the current menu from the display This command is equivalent to pressing the front panel Menu off Group Miscellaneous Syntax CLEARMenu CLS No Query Form Clears the following Event Queue m Standard Event Status Register Status Byte Register except the MAV bit If the CLS command immediately follows an lt EOI gt the Output Queue and MAV bit Status Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared The MAV bit indicates that information is in the output queue The device clear DCL GPIB control message will clear the output queue and thus MAV CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an OPC This will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when the CLS command is executed Group Status and Error Syntax CLS Related Commands DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Examples CLS clears the oscilloscope status data structures 2 100 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual CURSor Group S
181. WFMInpre PT_Off lt NR1 gt WFMInpre PT_Off Arguments are ignored DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual WFMinpre XINcr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMiInpre XUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in units specified by WFMInpre XUNit Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XINcr lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XINcr lt NR3 gt is the horizontal interval representation WFMINPRE XINCR 3E 3 sets the interval between incoming waveform points to 3 ms WFMINPRE XINCR might return WFMINPRE XINCR 1 0000E 3 indicating that if WFMInpre XUNit is set to s there is a 1 ms interval between incoming waveform points Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform Supported units are Hz A A A A V A W A dB A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XUNit lt QString gt WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XUNit lt QString gt contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 337 Commands Listed in Alphabeti
182. WFMOUTPRE YMULT might return WFMOUTPRE YMULT 4 0000E 3 indicating that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV div for 8 bit waveform data WFMOutpre YOFf Query Only Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 349 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples See the description of WFMInpre YOFf to see how this position is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YOFf DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOUTPRE YOFF might return WFMOUTPRE YOFF 50 0000E 0 indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions below center screen for 8 bit waveform data WFMOutpre YUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the vertical units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YUNit DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE YUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE YUNIT dB indicating that the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels WFMOutpre YZEro Query Only Group 2 35
183. YPE SYNC PARity CHecksum HEADertime RESPtime FRAMetime TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC PARity sets the LIN error type to parity CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum HEADertime sets the LIN error type to header time RESPtime sets the LIN error type to response time FRAMetime sets the LIN error type to frame time TRIGGER A BUS BL LIN ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to checksum TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating the LIN error type is SYNC DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Bus TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue lt QString gt is the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS B1L LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE 110010 sets the identifier value to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS B1L LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicating the identifier value is XXX XXX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition for a RS232C trig
184. You can precede any command with white space characters White space characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and OB through 20 hexadecimal 0 through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal m The oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combination of white space characters and line feeds DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 3 Command Syntax 2 4 Abbreviating Concatenating You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands Each command in this documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals For example you can enter the command ACQuire NUMAvsg simply as ACQ NUMA or acq numa Abbreviation rules may change over time as new oscilloscope models are introduced Thus for the most robust code use the full spelling If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of query responses you can further control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full length with the VERBose command You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order received When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules 1 Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning colon on all commands except the first one For example the commands TRIGger MODe NORMal and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 can be concatenated into the following single command
185. ZERO 0 0000 WFMINPRE BYT_NR 1 WFMINPRE BIT_NR 8 WFMINPRE ENCDG BIN WFMINPRE BN_FMT RI WFMINPRE BYT_OR MSB WFMINPRE NR_PT 10000 WFMINPRE PT_FMT Y WFMINPRE XUNIT s WFMINPRE XINCR 4 0000E 9 WFMINPRE XZERO 0 0000 WFMINPRE PT_OFF O WFMINPRE YUNIT V WFMINPRE YMULT 4 0000E 3 WFMINPRE YOFF 0 0000 WFMINPRE YZERO 0 0000 DATA DESTINATION REF1 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA SOURCE CH1 DATA START 1 DATA STOP 10000 DATA WIDTH 1 NOTE The TEKSecure command can take up to five minutes to complete The oscilloscope is inoperable during this period Group Miscellaneous Syntax TEKSecure Examples TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories This is a program example of how to generate an SRQ when TEKSECURE completes Bit O of the DESE Device Event Status Enable Register enables OPC to be reported to the SESR Standard Event Status Register DESE 255 Bit O of the ESER Event Status Enable Register enables OPC to be summarized in the ESB Event Status Bit of the SBR Status Byte Register ESE 255 Bit 5 of the SRE Service Request Enable Register enables DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 265 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TIME Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples the generation of SRQ when the ESB bit of the SBR becomes TRUE SRE 32 TEKSECURE OPC When the TEKSECURE operation has completed the OPC bit of the SESR will be TRUE and SRQ wil
186. abetical Order CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor X rectangular units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta Query Only Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the Y rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2 The cursor is specified by x Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt is the coordinate in volts CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor Y rectangular units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts 2 112 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURVe Transfers waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format Each waveform transferred includes a waveform preamble which contains the data format scale and associated information For analog waveforms the CURVe query transfers data from the oscilloscope The data source is specified by the DATa SOUrce command The first and last data points are specified by the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands The oscilloscope returns data from the last acquisition if the source is a channel waveform that is being previewed The data does not reflect the acquisition preview para
187. alue Trigger TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts TRIGGER EXTERNAL YUNITS might return TRIGGER EXTERNAL YUNITS v if the vertical unit is volts TRIGger STATE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples TST Query Only Returns the current state of the triggering system Trigger TRIGger STATE TRIGger A MODe ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger information AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in the automatic mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and that the oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger SAVE indicates that the oscilloscope is in save mode and is not acquiring data TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope triggered and is acquiring the post trigger information TRIGGER STATE might return TRIGGER STATE ARMED indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired Tests self test the interface and returns a 0 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 329 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax TST Examples TST always returns 0 UNLock No Query Form Unlocks the front panel The command is equivalent to LOCk NONe Group Miscellaneous Syntax UNLock ALL Related Commands LOCk Arguments Examples VERBose Group Syntax Related Commands 2 330 ALL specifies that all front panel buttons and knobs are unlock
188. analog channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This setting applies to all trigger types that use the channel This command requires a DPO3 AUTO DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS THReshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL lt NR3 gt BUS THReshold CH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a TTL preset high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples BUSY Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Sets the upper threshold for each channel This applies to all search and trigger types that use the channel Bus BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 sets the CH1 upper threshold to 800 mV BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 might return BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 indicating that the CH1 upper threshold is set to 800 mV Returns the status of the oscilloscope This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program Status and Error BUSY OPC WAI lt NR1 gt 0 means th
189. and automatically resizes the message box If you want a custom message box size send the MESSAGE BOX command after changing the text using the MESSAGE SHOW command Message box settings and data are saved and restored in saved setups Group Display Syntax MESSage BOX lt X1 gt lt Y1 gt lt xX2 gt lt yY2 gt MESSage BOX Related Commands MESSage STATE MESSage SHOW MESSage CLEAR Arguments lt X1 gt and lt X2 gt 0 to 1023 and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis lt X1 gt defines the left and lt X2 gt defines the right side of the window lt Y1 gt and lt Y2 gt 0 to 767 and are pixel positions along the vertical axis lt Y1 gt defines the top and lt Y2 gt defines the bottom of the window The reserved height of all characters is 16 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully display characters lt x2 gt and lt Y2 gt are optional because the MESSAGE SHOW DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 201 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order command automatically sizes the box to fit the message All four values are returned in a query MESSage CLEAR No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples MESSage SHOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 202 Removes the message text from the message window Display MESSage CLEAR MESSage BOX MESSage SHOW MESSage STATE MESSage CLEAR removes the message from the message window Clears the cont
190. arch condition for a LIN search Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField IDenti fier DATA IDANDDATA WAKEup SLEEP ERROR SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDi tion SYNCField specifies to search on the sync field IDentifier specifies to search on the identifier DATA specifies to search on the data IDANDDATA specifies to search on the identifier and the data WAKEup specifies to search on wake up DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 231 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SLEEP specifies to search on sleep ERROR specifies to search on errors SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating a search on the sync field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA Bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue lt Qstring gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string of 1s Os or Xs representing the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN
191. arch to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Sets or returns the logic operator for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 241 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments AND places a mark if all conditions are true NANd places a mark if any of the conditions are false NOR places a mark if all conditions are false OR places a mark if any of the conditions are true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state SEARCH SE
192. arger DATA STOP might return DATA STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last waveform data point that will be transferred DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual DATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DDT Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATA STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000 Sets or returns the date the oscilloscope displays Miscellaneous DATE lt QString gt DATE TIME lt QString gt is a date in the form yyyy mm dd where yyyy refers to a four digit year number mm refers to a two digit month number from 01 to 12 and dd refers to a two digit day number in the month DATE 2006 01 24 specifies that the date is set to January 24 2006 DATE might return DATE 2006 01 24 indicating the current date is set to January 24 2006 Allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that execute when the oscilloscope receives a TRG command or the GET IEEE488 2 interface message Define Device Trigger DDT is a special alias that the TRG command uses Miscellaneous DDT lt Block gt lt QString gt DDT ALlas TRG lt Block gt is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 119 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DESE 2 120
193. ata point value is the average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval This is a form of averaging where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition The number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose the average AVErage specifies averaging mode in which the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The oscilloscope processes the number of waveforms you specify into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMAVg command ENVe lope specifies envelope mode where the resulting waveform shows the PEAKdetect range of data points from every waveform acquisition ACQUIRE MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions ACQUIRE MODE might return ACQUire MODe AVERAGE indicating that the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform acquisitions DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire NUMACq Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns ACQuire NUMAVg Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since start
194. ata points in the waveform record Setting DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform The DATa SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the oscilloscope You can only transfer one waveform at a time Waveforms sent to the oscilloscope are always stored in one of the reference memory locations Use the DATa DESTination command to specify a reference memory location Each waveform you transfer has an associated waveform preamble which contains information such as horizontal scale vertical scale and the other settings in effect when the waveform was created Refer to the individual WFMInpre and WFMOutpre commands for information DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Scaling Waveform Data Transferring Waveform Data from the Oscilloscope Transferring Waveform Data to the Oscilloscope Command Groups Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform preamble You can transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an external controller using the following sequence 1 2 3 4 m Select the waveform source s using DATa SOUrce Specify the waveform data format using DATa ENCdg Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using DATa STARt and DATa STOP Tra
195. ate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 66 Sets or returns the bit rate for CAN bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate lt NR1 gt RATE1OK RATE20K RATE33K RATE37K RATESOK RATE62K RATE83K RATE92K RATELOOK RATE125K RATE250K RATE500K RATE800K RATELM BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate lt NR1 gt sets the bit rate to the closest bit rate supported by the instrument RATE10K sets the bit rate to 10 kbps RATE2OK sets the bit rate to 20 kbps RATE 33K sets the bit rate to 33 kbps DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RATE37K sets the bit rate to 37 kbps RATESOK sets the bit rate to 50 kbps RATE62K sets the bit rate to 62 kbps RATE83kK sets the bit rate to 83 kbps RATE97K sets the bit rate to 97 kbps RATELOOK sets the bit rate to 100 kbps RATE125K sets the bit rate to 125 kbps RATE250K sets the bit rate to 250 kbps RATESOOK sets the bit rate to 500 kbps RATE8OOK sets the bit rate to 800 kbps RATE1M sets the bit rate to 1 Mbps The query always returns the numerical bit rate value bus bl can bitrate rate400k sets the CAN bit rate to 400K bus bl can bitrate might return BUS B1 CAN BITRATE RATE800K indicating the bit rate is set to 800K BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the probing me
196. ate FACtory STATus 2 84 CALibrate INTERNal STARt 2 85 CALibrate INTERNal STATus 2 85 CALibrate RESults FACtory 2 86 CALibrate RESults SPC 2 87 CALibrate INTERNal 2 85 CALibrate RESults 2 86 Index 1 Index Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group 2 16 CH lt x gt BANdwidth 2 87 CH lt x gt COUPIling 2 88 CH lt x gt DESKew 2 89 CH lt x gt IMPedance 2 89 CH lt x gt INVert 2 90 CH lt x gt LABel 2 90 CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 90 CH lt x gt POSition 2 92 CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero 2 93 CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND 2 93 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss 2 93 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 94 CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange 2 94 CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN 2 95 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber 2 96 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE 2 96 CH lt x gt PRObe ID 2 95 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance 2 96 CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal 2 97 CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts 2 97 CH lt x gt PRObe 2 92 CH lt x gt SCAle 2 97 CH lt x gt TERmination 2 98 CH lt x gt VOLts 2 99 CH lt x gt YUNits 2 99 CH lt x gt 2 87 CLEARMenu 2 100 CLS 2 100 Command Groups 2 11 Cursor Command Group 2 17 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 102 CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt 2 105 CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt 2 105 CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 106 CURSor VBArs VDELTa 2 108 CURSor X Y POLar RADIUS DELta 2 108 CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt 2 108 CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts 2 109 CURSor X Y POLar THETA
197. ate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt For SOURce 1 Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements For delay or phase measurements sets or returns the waveform to measure from For SOUrce2 Sets or returns the waveform to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Group Measurement DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 175 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt CH1 CH4 or MATH is the source waveform MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 2 176 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the immediate measurement type Measurement MEASUrement IMMed TYPe AMP1itude AREa BURSt CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXi mum MEAN MINImun NDUty NEDGECount NOVershoot NPULSECount NwIdth PEDGECount PDUty PERIod PHASe PK2Pk POVershoot PPULSECount PwIdth RISe RMS MEASUrement IMMed TYPe AMP1itude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while
198. ated commands and queries are executed in the order received Here are some invalid concatenations DISPlay STY1le NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 no colon before ACQuire DISPlay GRAticule FULL DOTSONLY OFF extra colon before DOTSonly You could use DISPlay DOTsonly OFF instead DISPlay GRAticule FULL TRG colon before a star command MATH HOR1zontal SCAle 1 0e 1 HORizontal POSition 5 0e levels of the mnemonics are different either remove the second use of HORizontal or place MATH in front of HORi zontal POSi tion Terminating This documentation uses lt EOM gt End of Message to represent a message terminator Table 2 4 End of Message Terminator Symbol Meaning lt EOM gt Message terminator The end of message terminator must be the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte The last data byte may be an ASCII line feed LF character This oscilloscope does not support ASCH LF only message termination The oscilloscope always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI Constructed Mnemonics Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics For example a channel mnemonic can be CH1 CH2 CH3 or CH4 You use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic For example there is a CH1 POSition command and there is also a CH2 POSition command In the command descriptions this list of choices is abbreviated as CH lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual
199. ber of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe RESistance Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the Auxiliary input AUXin PRObe S IGnal Sets or returns the input bypass setting on VPI probes that support input bypass AUXin PRObe UNIts Returns the units of measure of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input CH lt x gt Returns vertical parameters for the specified channel DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 30 Vertical Commands cont Command Command Groups Description CH lt x gt BANdwidth Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified channel CH lt x gt COUPling Sets or returns the coupling setting for the specified channel CH lt x gt DESKew Sets or returns the deskew time for the specified channel CH lt x gt IMPedance Sets or returns channel lt x gt input impedance CH lt x gt INVert Sets or returns the invert function for the specified channel CH lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for channel lt x gt CH lt x gt OFFSet Sets or returns the channel offset CH lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the channel vertical position CH lt x gt PRObe Returns the gain resistance units and ID of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero Sets the
200. cal Order EVENT Query Only Returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the results of the last ESR read EVENT also removes the returned value from the Event Queue Group Status and Error Syntax EVENT Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVMsg SRE STB Examples EVENT might return EVENT 110 showing that there was an error in a command header See page 3 12 Messages EVMsg Query Only Removes a single event code from the Event Queue that is associated with the results of the last ESR read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message For information see Event Handling Group Status and Error Syntax EVMsg Related Commands ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT SRE STB Returns The event code and message in the following format lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt QString gt lt Message gt lt Command gt where lt Command gt is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope As much of the command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the lt Message gt and lt Command gt string combined The command string is right justified Examples EVMSG might return EVMSG 110 Command header error DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 135 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EVQ
201. cal Order Examples WFMinpre XZEro Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YMUIt 2 338 WFMINPRE XUNIT HZ specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are hertz WFMINPRE XUNIT might return WFMINPRE XUNIT s indicating that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds Sets or returns the position value in XUNits of the first sample of the incoming waveform Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XZEro WFMInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XZEro lt NR3 gt argument is the floating point value of the position in XUNits of the first sample in the incoming waveform If XUNits is s lt NR3 gt is the time of the first sample in the incoming waveform WFMINPRE XZERO 5 7E 6 which indicates the trigger occurred 5 7 us before the first sample in the waveform WFMINPRE XZERO might return WFMINPRE XZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the trigger occurs 7 5 us after the first sample in the waveform Sets or returns the vertical scale factor of the incoming waveform expressed in YUNits per waveform data point level For one byte waveform data there are 256 data point levels For two byte waveform data there are 65 536 data point levels YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve _in_dl is a data point in CURVe value_in_un
202. change color as specified below Index 0 Black background Index 1 Yellow Ch 1 Index 2 Cyan Ch 2 Index 3 Magenta Ch 3 Index 4 Green Ch 4 Index 5 Red math Index 6 White reference Index 7 Orange Index 8 Gray Graticule Index 9 White text DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 203 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Index 10 Tek blue Index 11 Bright blue Index 12 Undefined Index 13 Blue Index 14 Undefined Index 15 Dark blue Bit 4 If set the foreground color is set to the default foreground color Bit 3 If set the background color is set to the default background color Bit 2 Undefined Bit 1 Undefined Bit 0 Undefined The ESC escape character followed by the character turns inverse video on or off and can be embedded in the message string Example abcESC defESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion is displayed in inverse video Example abcESC defESC ESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion appears in the channel 3 color magenta and the ghi portion appears in the normal text color except it s in inverse video An alternate way to enter characters is octal escape sequences This consists of a backslash followed by numerals in the standard C language printf fashion Another way to enter characters is xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of the character to display An advantag
203. commands can set and query measurement parameters You can assign some parameters such as waveform sources differently for each measurement Other parameters such as reference levels have only one value which applies to all measurements Table 2 25 Measurement Commands Command Description MEASUrement Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot Removes the measurement snapshot display MEASUrement GATing Sets or returns the measurement gating MEASUrement IMMed Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters MEASUrement IMMed DELay Returns information about the immediate delay measurement DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 25 Command Groups 2 26 Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection Sets or returns the search direction to use for immediate delay measurements MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for immediate delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Sets or returns the from source for all single channel immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Sets or returns the type of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Returns the units of the immediate measurement MEASU
204. common reference point is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 10 This measurement is available only on DPO models FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 100 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models LOW measures the Low reference 0 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the mo
205. curs when a signal passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIGger A EDGE commands LOGic specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger A LOGIc commands PULSe specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger A PULse commands BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a communications signal is found Supports CAN PC SPI and RS232 communications signals VIDeo specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE TRIGGER A TYPE might return TRIGGER A TYPE PULSE indicating that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the upper threshold for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Used only for runt and slew rate trigger types Trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt is the threshold level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2 TRIGG
206. d affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe lt NR3 gt is the low reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default low reference level is 10 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 15 sets the high reference level to 15 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 10 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 10 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 Group Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 197 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference
207. d by a period and the three character extension Waveform files should have a csv extension for comma separated spreadsheet format files SAVe IMAGe No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 216 Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file Supported image formats are PNG Windows Bitmap and TIFF If an extension for a supported file type is added to the file name then the corresponding format will be used If no supported extension is added to the file the format to use will be determined by the value obtained from the SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat query Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe lt file path gt SAVe ASSIgn TY Pe lt file path gt is a filename including path where the image will be saved If you do not specify a directory the oscilloscope will store the file in the current working directory File name extensions are not required but are highly recommended The images will be saved in E DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments SAVe IMAGe LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the file format to use for saving screen images when the file type cannot be determined from the given file name or when screen images are captured by using the front panel Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat PNG BMP TIFf SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat SAVe IMAGe PNG
208. d in Alphabetical Order Examples ZOOM MODE OFF turns off Zoom mode ZOOM MODE might return ZOOM MODE 1 indicating that Zoom mode is currently turned on ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt Query Only Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax Z00m ZOOM lt x gt Examples ZOOM ZOOM1 might return ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 SCALE 400 0000E 12 POSITION 46 8986 FACTOR 50 0000E 3 HORIZO NTAL POSITION 46 8986 SCALE 400 0000E 12 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Query Only Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax Z00m ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Returns lt NR1 gt is the zoom factor of a zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified zoom where x is the integer 1 representing the single zoom window lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORi zontal POSition 2 352 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt is a value from 0 to 100 00 and is the percent of the upper window that is to the left of screen center when the zoom factor is 1 or greater ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 sets the Zoom reference pointer at 50 of acquired waveform ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION might return ZOOM1 HORIZ
209. d with the CURVe query or CURVe command Waveform Transfer DATa INIT SNAp DATa CURVe DATa STARt DATa STOP DATa ENCdg WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_Pt INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults except for DATa STOP which is set to the current acquisition record length SNAp sets DATa STARt and DATa STOP to match the current waveform cursor positions DATA might return DATA DESTINATION REF1L ENCDG RIBINARY SOURCE CH1 START 1 STOP 500 WIDTH 1 DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual DATa DESTination Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa ENCdg Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the reference memory location for storing waveform data transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command Waveform Transfer DATa DESTination REF lt x gt DATa DESTination CURVe REF lt x gt is the reference location where the waveform will be stored DATA DESTINATION might return DATA DESTINATION REF3 indicating that reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory location for incoming waveform data DATA DESTINATION REF1 indicates that incoming waveform data be stored in reference 1 Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN_Fmt andWFM
210. dds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveform storing the results in Math 1 MATH DEFINE might return MATH1 DEFINE CH2 REF2 as the expression that defines Math 1 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or non live math reference waveforms Math MATH 1 HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt is the of the math waveform that precedes center screen It can vary from 0 0 to 100 0 MATH HORIZONTAL POSITION 10 sets the horizontal position to 10 pretrigger MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Group Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for dual math waveforms that have source waveforms that are reference waveforms The horizontal scale of a dual math waveform with a channel source waveform is set through the HORizontal SCAle command Math DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 165 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt is the math horizontal scale in seconds MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE might return MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 0E 4 indicating that the math horizontal scale is 200 u MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts Group Syntax Examples Returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value Math MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS mig
211. dicating that the B trigger time is set to 16 ns Sets or returns the type of B trigger The only supported B trigger type is EDGE Trigger TRIGger B TYPe EDGE TRIGger B TYPe TRIGger A TY Pe EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge TRIGGER B TYPE might return TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE 2 327 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Trigger TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGger EXTernal Query Only Group Syntax Returns all external trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger EXTernal TRIGger EXTernal PRObe Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 328 Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector Trigger TRIGger EXTernal PRObe lt NR3 gt TRIGger EXTernal PRObe lt NR3 gt is the attenuation factor of the probe TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE might return TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE 1 0E1 for a 10X probe DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the external trigger vertical Y units v
212. divisions above the center horizontal graticule REF1L VERTICAL POSITION might return REF 1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000 00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center horizontal graticule REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns the vertical scale for the reference waveform specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms but affects reference and math waveforms differently from channel waveforms For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified Vertical REF lt x gt VERTiCal SCAle lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt VERTiCal SCAle CH lt x gt SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 213 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REM No Query Form RST No Query Form 2 214 Arguments Examples Group Syn
213. ds Arguments Examples FILESystem CWD Returns the directory listing of the current working directory and the number of bytes of free space available This query is the same as the FILESystem DIR query and the FILESystem FREESpace query File System FILESystem FILESystem CWD FILESystem DELEte FILESystem DIR FILESystem REName None FILESYSTEM might return FILESYSTEM DIR tek00000 bmp elusiveGlitch1l png TEMP TMP filel wfm file2 wfm MATH1 wfm REF1 wfm REF2 wfm FREESPACE 30212096 Sets or returns the current working directory CWD for FILESystem commands The default working directory is D Anytime you use this command to change the directory the directory that you specify is retained as the current working directory until you either change the directory or you delete the directory If you delete the current working directory the oscilloscope resets current working DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 137 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples directory to the default directory D the next time the oscilloscope is powered on or the next time you execute a file system command This command supports the permutations of file and directory names supported by Microsoft Windows Relative path names for example Temp Absolute path names for example D MyWaveform Implied relative path names for example newfile txt becomes D Tek
214. ds Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DIAG RESULT LOG might return DIAG RESULT LOG NOT RUN CPU NOT RUN DISPLAY NOT RUN FPANEL NOT RUN I0O NOT RUN ACQ NOT RUN RO M NOT RUN APPKEY DIAg SELect No Query Form Sets the type of diagnostics grouping Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg SELect ALL APPKey CPU DISplay FPAnel IO ROM ACQ Arguments ALL runs all diagnostic groups APPKey runs just the application key diagnostic group CPU runs just the CPU diagnostic group DISp lay runs just the display circuit diagnostic group FFPAnel runs just the front panel diagnostic group IO runs just the IO board diagnostic group ROM runs just the IO board diagnostic group ACQ runs just the acquisition system diagnostic group DIAg SELect lt function gt No Query Form Runs self tests on the specified system subsystem Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg SELect lt function gt Arguments lt function gt specifies a single oscilloscope subsystem on which to run self tests diagnostics Valid values are ACQ tests the acquisition system APPKey tests the application keys CPU tests the CPU DISp lay tests the display DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 123 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FPAne tests the front panel controls IO tests the IO ports ROM tests the system read only memory Examples DIAG SELECT CPU sets the oscilloscope to run just CPU tests DIAg STATE No Query Fo
215. e Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger search if the condition involves RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 236 Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a RS232 trigger search if the Trigger condition is TX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in Bytes DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a RS232 trigger search if the condition involves RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B
216. e acquisition mode CALibrate FACtory STARt CALibrate FACtory CONTinue CALibrate FACtory PREVious m HARDCopy HARDCopy START m DIAg STATE EXECute m SAVe IMAGe lt file as quoted string gt m SAVe SETUp lt file as quoted string gt m RECAII SETUp lt file as quoted string gt m SAVe WAVEform lt file as quoted string gt E RECAII WAVEform lt file as quoted string gt m CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute m TEKSecure DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 3 7 Status and Events For example a typical application might involve acquiring a single sequence waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform You could use the following command sequence to do this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time It may not finish before the oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement see the following figure This can result in an incorrect amplitude value ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure
217. e sending the second query DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Event Queue The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events If than 32 events stack up in the Event Queue the 32nd event is replaced by event code 350 Queue Overflow Read the Event Queue with the EVENT query which returns only the event number with the EVMSG query which returns the event number and a text description of the event or with the ALLEV query which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the event Reading an event removes it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you must use the ESR query to read the summary of the event from the SESR This makes the events summarized by the ESR read available to the EVENT and EVMSG queries and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous ESR reads but not read from the Event Queue Events that follow an ESR read are put in the Event Queue but are not available until ESR is used again Event Handling Sequence The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system In the explanation that follows numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 3 5 Status and Events Device Event Status Enable Register DESER Read using DESE Write using DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR Read using ESR Cannot be written
218. e LIN standard to V1X V2X sets the LIN standard to V2X MIXed sets the LIN standard to MIXED DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 73 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples BUS B lt x gt POSition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V1Xx sets the LIN standard is V1X BUS B1 LIN STANDARD might return BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V2X indicating the LIN standard is V2X Sets or returns the position of the bus lt x gt waveform on the display where x is the bus number 1 through 4 This command requires a DPO3 AUTO DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt BUS B lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt specifies the position BUS B lt x gt RS232C BiTRate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 74 Sets or returns the RS232 bit rate for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate lt NR1 gt is the bit rate in bits per second 50 75 110 134 150 300 600 1200 1800 2000 2400 3600 4800 7200 9600 14400 15200 19200 28800 31250 38400 56000 57600 76800 115200 128000 230400 460800 921600 1382400 1843200 2764800 You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
219. e a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax 2 240 Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH 1 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number The value of MATH is 1 for all oscilloscopes Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the specified reference waveform level for an edge trigger se
220. e memory Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory STATus DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Exam p les CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS PASS indicating that factory calibration passed CALibrate INTERNal No Query Form This command starts a signal path compensation Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate INTERNal Arguments None Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL starts a serial path compensation cycle CALibrate INTERNal STARt No Query Form Starts the internal signal path calibration SPC of the oscilloscope You can use the CALibrate INTERNal STATus query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate INTERNal STARt Related Commands CALibrate RESults SPC Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL START initiates the internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope CALibrate INTERNal STATus Query Only Returns the current status of the oscilloscope internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation Group Calibration and Diagnostic DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 85 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples CALibrate INTERNal STATUS CAL This query will return one of the following m INIT indicates the oscilloscope has not had internal signal path calibration run
221. e nes 2 28 Save and Recall Command Group 0 cece cece nee eee eee eee ene e nen cent nee ee es 2 29 Search Command Group ce cece cece tet inaia ina E EEE EEE EEE a 2 31 Status and Error Command Group ccccce cece cece eee eee eee ene e nee eee nee eee e teen ees 2 35 Trigger Command Group iiss ciiscasahisasdudadd ea E EAEE EEN ateckniendehs 2 36 Vertical Command Group ccc cece cece n nnn EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE ES 2 44 Waveform Transfer Command Group ccc cece nce e cece eee en ne nee een tenet eae e nee eennennees 2 47 Zoom Command Group ce ccc eee eee eee eee EEE EEE EEE Eee EEE EEE EEE ES 2 52 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 0 ccc cece cece cece cece ee eee ee ee ene e nee enaeene ena eeea 2 53 Stat s and EVemts sesters ire eE canteen sen ease LE EEE EEEE EEEE EE EE EEN 3 1 ROGISUGES enee EE E EEO E E E E OERE 3 1 OUCTIOS E T A TE T E T 3 4 Event Handling SegUentescssrensssee nrin ee E E EEEE EE ERES 3 5 Synchronization Methods 02 s seccteisbidadacvderseneeeabes TET OEE OET OE 3 7 Appendix A Character Set vicccs cossdanccssatadtoonceiudssetecis toa steadiastamnteeniaaes thier gncessebageaeaeews A 1 Appendix B Reserved Words cc cece cence nee EEEE EEEE EEEE RE EE EEE Ed B 1 Index DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual i Table of Contents ii DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started This manual explains the use of commands for remotel
222. e of the oscilloscope for all live waveforms Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale time per division The oscilloscope sampling system always samples at the maximum rate so the acquisition interval may include than one sample DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 53 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 54 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples The acquisition mode which you set using this ACQuire MODe command determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples Acquisition ACQuire MODe SAMple PEAKdetect HIRes AVErage ENVelope ACQuire MODe ACQuire NUMAVg CURVe SAMp le specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that is taken during the acquisition interval In sample mode all waveform data has 8 bits of precision You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe query but the lower order 8 bits of data will be zero SAMple is the default mode PEAKdetect specifies the display of high low range of the samples taken from a single waveform acquisition The high low range is displayed as a vertical column that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed d
223. e of these methods is that any controller program can be used Another advantage is it s easy to access characters with the high bit set that is those characters with a decimal value greater than 127 An alternate way to enter certain characters is with a backslash followed by a single character following standard Unix as described in the table below n Newline carriage return and line feed Backslash is required to get a backslash character t Horizontal tab the next 2 characters specify the pixel column to tab to as explained earlier If a backslash is followed by an undefined special character the backslash is ignored and the character following it is accepted as is NOTE The use of any escape codes other than those described above may produce unpredictable results 2 204 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples MESSage STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MESSage SHOW Hello World displays Hello world in the upper left corner of the box you can define the box size with the MESSAGE BOX command MESSage SHOW Hello World hello displays Hello world hello in the upper left corner of the box and the word world is displayed in inverse video In this example stands for the escape character The escape character may appear differently for you depending on your controller program Contro
224. e oscilloscope is not busy processing a command whose execution time is extensive lt NR1 gt means the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands listed in the table below DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 83 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Examples Commands that affect BUSY response Operation Command Single sequence ACQuire STATE ON or acquisition ACQuire STATE RUN or ACQuire STATE1 when ACQuire STOPAfter is set to SEQuence Hard copy operation HARDCopy STArt Calibration step Refer to the optional oscilloscope Service Manual BUSY might return BUSY 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is currently busy Performs an internal self calibration and returns the oscilloscope calibration status NOTE Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self calibration The self calibration can take several minutes to complete No other commands are executed until calibration is complete Calibration and Diagnostic CAL lt NR1 gt indicates the calibration did not complete successfully lt NR1 gt 0 indicates the calibration completed without errors CAL starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the calibration was successful CALibrate FACtory STATus Query Only Group Syntax 2 84 Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatil
225. e over time It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often Display DISplay PERSistence lt NR3 gt CLEAR AUTO MINImum INFInite DISplay PERSistence lt NR3 gt specifies the time of the persistence CLEAR resets the persist time count down and clears the display of acquired points INFInite displays waveform points until a control change resets the acquisition system When persistence is set to infinite it does not mean that the brightness of any pixel should never decrease The brightness of a pixel is proportionally dependent on the ratio between its intensity which does NOT decrease at infinite persistence and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen Thus if a particular pixel gets hit less often than others its brightness will decrease over time It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often AUTO specifies that the oscilloscope automatically determines the best waveform persistence based on the value of waveform intensity DISPLAY INTEnsITY WAVEFORM MINImum specifies that the waveform persistence is set to the minimum value of 0 0E0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 3 specifies that the waveform points are displayed fading for 3 seconds before they completely disappear DiSplay STYle DOTsonly 2 128 Group Syntax Turns on or off the dots only mode for the waveform display Display DISplay STYle DOTsonly ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay STYle DOTsonly DP
226. e sensitive Miscellaneous PASSWord lt QString gt NEWpass PUD lt QString gt is the password and can include up to 10 characters The factory default password is XYZZY and is always valid PASSWORD XYZZY enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands PASSWORD disables the PUB and NEWpass set commands You can still use the query version of PUD Sets or returns the power on status flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is true the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power on When PSC is false the current values in the DESER SRER and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are restored at power on Status and Error PSC OFF ON NR1I gt PSC DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 207 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples PUD Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples RCL No Query Form 2 208 DESE ESE FACtory RST SRE OFF sets the power on status clear flag to false ON sets the power on status clear flag to true lt NR1 gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false This disables the power on clear allowing the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power on any other value sets the power on status clear flag to true enabling the power on status clear preventing any SRQ asse
227. e specifies the rising edge MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE or FALL MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM 4 18E 9 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 184 Returns the mean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN 514 71E 09 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the minimum value for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MINIMUM might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MINIMUM 1 75E 09 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Group Syntax
228. e the status of the oscilloscope and control events Several commands and queries used with the oscilloscope are common to all IEEE488 2 compliant devices The IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these commands and queries The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 28 Status and Error Commands Command Description ALLEv Returns all events and their messages BUSY Returns oscilloscope status CLS Clears status DESE Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register ESE Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESR Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register EVENT Returns event code from the event queue EVMsg Returns event code message from the event queue EVQty Return number of events in the event queue OPC Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register when all pending operations are finished Or returns 1 when all current operations are finished PSC Sets or returns the power on status flag PUD Sets or returns a string of protected user data RST Resets the oscilloscope to factory default settings DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 35 Command Groups Table 2 28 Status and Error Commands cont Command Description SRE Sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register STB Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register WAI Prevents
229. ed UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs Sets or returns the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses Keywords can be both headers and arguments NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk This command does affects the verbose state of both the USBTMC and VXI 11 interfaces Refer to the Introduction for information Miscellaneous VERBose OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer LRN SET DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WAI No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF sets the Verbose state to false which returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries ON sets the Verbose state to true which returns full length keywords for applicable setting queries lt NR1 gt a 0 returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries any other value returns full length keywords VERBOSE ON enables the Verbose state VERBOSE might return VERB 0 indicating that the Verbose state is disabled Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program See page 3 7 Synchronization Methods Status and Error WAT BUSY OPC
230. ed by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command This is equivalent to watching the cursor readout in the display while using the appropriate cursor mode Cursor CURSor VBArs DELTa CURSor VBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt CURSOR VBARS DELTA might return CURSOR VBARS DELTa 1 0640E 00 indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1 064 s CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Query Only Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks for cursor lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 105 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples Cursor CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt CURSor VBArs UNIts lt x gt specifies the cursor Valid values are 1 and 2 lt NR3 gt indicates the value of one of the tics The units are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command CURSor VBArs HPOS2 might return CURSOR VBARS HPOS2 100E 3 indicating the value of one vertical bar tick CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples 2 106 Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified vertical bar cursor The cursor is specified by lt x gt which can be or 2 Values are with respect to trigger position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform if horizontal units are not set to time Use the CURSor VBArs UNIts command to specify units Cursor CURSor VBArs POSITION l
231. ed in Alphabetical Order CURSor HBArs Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSor HBArs CURSOR HBARS might return the horizontal bar setting as CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 320 0000E 03 POSITION2 320 0000E 03 UNITS BASE CURSor HBArs DELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSor HBArs DELTa CURSor HBArs UNIts A floating point value with an exponent CURSOR HBARS DELTA might return CURSOR HBARS DELTA 5 0800E 00 indicating that the difference between the two cursors is 5 08 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Syntax 2 102 Sets or returns the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground which is expressed in vertical units usually volts The cursor is specified by x which can be or 2 Cursor CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples CURSor HBArs UNIts Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor FUNCtion lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position relative to ground CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 25 0E 3 positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal cursors at 25 mV CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 might return CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 64 0000E 03
232. el lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH2 PRObe RESistance might return CH2 PROBE RESISTANCE 10 0000E 6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to Channel 2 is 1 MQ NOTE This query will return 0 0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe does not report the input resistance Sets or returns the input bypass setting of a Tek VPI probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number The probe must support input bypass for example TCP0001 This command is ignored if sent to an unsupported probe Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal BYPass sets the probe to Bypass mode PASS sets the probe to Pass mode CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples CH lt x gt SCAle Returns a string describing the units of measure for the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts CH4 PROBE UNITS might return CH4 PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are volts Sets or returns the vertical scale for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 97 Commands Lis
233. ement channel Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Group Syntax Arguments Specifies or returns the reference level units used for measurement calculations NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSolute PERCent MEASUrement REFLevel METHOd ABSo lute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute commands This method is useful when DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 195 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples precise values are required for example when designing to published interface specifications such as RS 232 C PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent commands MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit user defined values are used for the reference levels MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference level units used are calculated a
234. en waveform cursors are displayed Cursor CURSor MODe TRACk INDependent CURSor MODe TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together For cursor 1 adjustments this ties the movement of the two cursors together however cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1 INDependent allows independent adjustment of the two cursors CURSOR MODE TRACK specifies that the cursor positions move in unison CURSOR MODE might return CURSOR MODE TRACK indicating that the two cursors move in unison CURSor VBArs Query Only Group Syntax 2 104 Returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSor VBArs DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSOR VBARS might return the following vertical bar settings CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITIONL 1 0000E 06 POSITION2 9 0000E 06 CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Arguments Returns the alternate readout for the waveform Vbar cursors specified by lt x gt This alternate readout is in effect for a bus waveform Cursor CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt x lt Il 1 specifies vertical bar cursor1 x lt ll 2 specifies vertical bar cursor2 CURSor VBArs DELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Returns the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units are specifi
235. ent warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid min max 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 549 Measurement warning Clipping positive Measurement warning Clipping negative Internal Warning The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the oscilloscope Table 3 10 Internal Warning Messages Code Message 630 Internal warning 500 overload DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events 3 18 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix A Character Set B7 B6 B5 BITS NUMBERS B4 B3 B2 B1 CONTROL SYMBOLS 0 20 40 LAO 60 LA16 0000 NUL DLE SP 0 0 o 10 16 20 32 30 48 1 GTL 21 LLO 41 LAI 61 LAI7 0001 SOH DC1 1 17 21 33 31 49 2 22 42 LA2 62 LA18 0010 STX DC2 g 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 23 43 LA3 63 LA19 0011 ETX DC3 3 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 4 SDC 24 DCL 44 LA4 64 LA20 0100 EOT DC4 4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 5 PPC 25 PPU 45 LA5 65 LA21 0101 ENQ NAK 5 15 21 25 37 35 53 26 46 LA6 66 LA22 0110 ACK SYN amp 6 16 22 26 38 36 54 27 47 LA7 67 LA23 011i BEL ETB 7 7117 23 27 39 37 55 10 GET 30 SPE 50 Las 70 LA24 1000 BS CAN 8 8 18 24 28 40 38 56 11 TCT 31 SPD 51 Lag 71 LA25 1001 HT EM 9 9 19 25 29 41 39 57 12 32 52 LA10 72 LA26 1010 LF SUB A 10 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 13 33
236. ents of the message window and displays the new message in the window Display MESSage SHOW lt QString gt MESSage SHOW MESSage BOX MESSage CLEAR MESSage STATE lt QString gt is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the Character Set Appendix A The maximum length of the message is 1000 characters the instrument ignores longer strings The message box size is set to fit the message You can also set the message area height and width using the MESSage BOX command The length of the message that fits in the message area depends on the contents of the message because the width of characters varies If the message exceeds the limits of the message box either horizontally or vertically the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order The message string itself is not altered The entire message can be returned as a query response regardless of what is displayed in the message box The message is left justified and is displayed on a single line starting with the top most line in the window A new line character can be embedded in the string to position the message on multiple lines You can also use white space and tab characters to position the message within a line Text which does not fit within the message box is truncated Defining a message box text string erases any previously displayed text within the mes
237. er lt new_address gt is the new IP address for the server Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk these commands never return headers This command does affect the Response Header Enable State of both the USBTMC and VXI 11 interfaces Refer to the Introduction for additional information Miscellaneous DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 149 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples HEADer OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer VERBose OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false This causes the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true This causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses You can then use the query response as a command lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false any other value sets this state to true HEADER OFF specifies that the oscilloscope omits headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned HEADER might return HEADER 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is including headers on applicable query responses HORizontal Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all settings for the
238. er can access the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet PASSWord lt new gt ETHERnet PASSWord lt new gt is a new password enclosed in quotes ETHERNET PASSWORD ZEN53 replaces the current Ethernet password with the new password ZENS3 ETHERNET PASSWORD might return ETHERNET PASSWORD ZENS53 ETHERnet PING No Query Form Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 133 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples Ethernet ETHERnet PING EXECute ETHERNET PING EXECUTE causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATUS Query Only Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet PING command to ping the gateway IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet PING STATUS Returns OK is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers NORESPONSE is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not answer INPROGRESS is returned if the ping operation is still executing ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet SUBNETMask lt QString gt ETHERnet SUBNETMask Arguments lt QString gt is the subnet mask value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 sets the subnet mask value using 2 134 standard IP address notation format DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabeti
239. ers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than not equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period less than the pattern trigger delta time setting TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 10 0E 00 sets the maximum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 0000E 9 indicating that the selected pattern may hold true for up to 8 ns and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 295 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WH
240. es this value to set the upper bandwidth limit NOTE Other values may be possible depending on the attached probes CH1L BANDWIDTH TWENTY sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz Sets or returns the input attenuator coupling setting for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt COUPling AC DC GND CH lt x gt COUP ling AC sets channel lt x gt to AC coupling DC sets channel lt x gt to DC coupling GND sets channel lt x gt to ground Only a flat ground level waveform will be displayed CH2 COUPLING GND sets channel 2 to ground CH3 COUPling might return CH3 COUPling DC indicating that channel 3 is set to DC coupling DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual CH lt x gt DESKew Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt IMPedance Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the deskew time for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent channel based delay time to the delay set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel This lets you compensate individual channels for different delays introduced by their individual input hook ups Vertical CH lt x gt DESKew lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt DESKew lt NR3 gt is the deskew time for channel lt x gt ranging from 100 ns to 100 ns
241. esets the oscilloscope settings to factory defaults Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location You can use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state at a later time Save and Recall SAV lt NR1 gt RCL RECAIL SETUp SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt specifies a location in which to save the state of the oscilloscope Location values range from 1 through 10 Using an out of range location value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten SAV 2 saves the current oscilloscope state in memory location 2 Sets or returns the assignment of the data to be saved when the front panel Save button is pressed Save and Recall SAVe ASSIgn TYPe IMAGe WAVEform SETUp SAVe ASSIgn TYPe 2 215 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments IMAGe assigns the Save button to save screen images WAVE form assigns the Save button to save waveforms SETUp assigns the Save button to save setups SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Saves the data from bus lt x gt to a specified file and location where x is the bus number Save and Recall SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt lt file path gt lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path location where the event table will be stored NOTE lt filename gt stands for a filename of up to 125 characters followe
242. ests on the specified system subsystem DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Cursor Command Group Command Groups Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display and readout You can use these commands to control the setups for cursor and cursor 2 such as cursor position You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions m Off Turns off the display of all cursors m Waveform Cursors Consists of two cursors Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform amplitude and time m Screen Cursors Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal and vertical cursors You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the waveform display area Table 2 17 Cursor Commands Command Description CURSor Returns cursor settings CURSor FUNCtion Sets or returns the cursor type CURSor HBArs Returns hbar cursor settings CURSor HBArs DELTa Returns hbars cursors vertical difference CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the hbar cursor lt x gt vertical position CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns hbar cursor units CURSor HBArs USE Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale CURSor MODe Sets or returns whether cursors move in unison or separately CURSor VBArs Sets or returns the position of vertical bar cursors CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt Returns the alternate readout for the waveform Vbar curso
243. etical Order HORizontal MAIn SCAle Sets or returns the main horizontal scale The specified scale value is rounded to a valid scale setting Group Horizontal Syntax HOR1 zontal MAIn SCAle HOR1 zontal MAIn SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the time per division The range is from 400 ps 1 ns through 1000 s depending on the record length Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2E 6 sets the main scale to 2 us per division HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division HORizontal MAlIn UNIts Query Only Returns the units string for the horizontal time base Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn UNIts Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS might return HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING Hz HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Query Only Returns the units string for the horizontal time base Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 153 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples HORizontal POSition Group Syntax Arguments Examples HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING might return tHORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING Hz indicating that the horizontal units string is set to Hertz Sets or returns the horizontal position If Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel When
244. eturns LINEAR Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_ORder DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT_ORDER returns WFMOUTPRE PT_ORDER LINEAR DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre WFld Query Only Returns a string describing several aspects of the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer Group Syntax WwFMOutpre wFId Related Commands DATa SOUrce Returns lt QString gt comprises the following comma separated fields documented in the tables below Table 2 42 Waveform Suffixes Field Description Examples Source The source identification string as it appears in CH1 4 the front panel scale factor readouts Math1 Ref1 4 Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the AC coupling waveform the Source1 waveform in the case of DC couplng Dual Waveform Math GND coupling Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of 100 0 mV div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 20 00 dB div will always be four digits The examples cover 45 00 deg div all known internal units 785 4 mrad div 500 0 uVs div 10 00 kV s div 200 0 mV div 50 00 unk div Horiz Scale A string containing the horizontal scale fact
245. etween the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH specifies a width pulse for the A trigger TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the width parameters for the pulse width trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWIDth TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Group Syntax Sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 299 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples NEGative specifies a negative pulse POSitive specifies a positive pulse TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to negative TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY might return TRIGGER A WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth SoUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 LINE EXT TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source
246. f quote character to open and close the string For example this is a valid string 2 You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow the previous rule For example this is an acceptable string 3 You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote For example here is a mark 4 Strings can have upper or lower case characters 5 If you use a GPIB network you cannot terminate a quoted string with the END message before the closing delimiter 6 A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string The return is treated as another character in the string 7 The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000 characters Here are some invalid strings Invalid string argument quotes are not of the same type m test lt EOI gt termination character is embedded in the string Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form as defined in the table below Table 2 12 Block Argument Symbol Meaning lt NZDig gt A nonzero digit character in the range of 1 9 lt Dig gt A digit character in the range of 0 9 lt DChar gt A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF 0 through 255 decimal lt Block gt A block of data bytes defined as lt Block gt lt NZDig gt lt Dig gt lt Dig gt lt DChar gt 0 lt DChar gt lt terminator gt lt NZDig gt
247. g CURVe data byte will be expected first Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre ENCdg ASCii BINary WFMInpre ENCdg DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre NR_Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMiInpre PT_Fmt Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre ENCdg ASC11 specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format BINary specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further interpretation requires knowledge of BYT_NR BIT_NR BN_FMT and BYT_OR WFMINPRE ENCDG ASC sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII format WFMINPRE ENCDG might return WFMINPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that the incoming waveform data is in binary format Sets or returns the number of data points that are in the incoming waveform record Waveform Transfer WFMInpre NR_Pt lt NR1 gt WFMInpre NR_Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMOutpre NR_ Pt lt NR1 gt is the number of data points if WFMInpre PT_Fmt is set to Y It is the number of min max pairs if WFMInpre PT_Fmt is set to ENV WFMINPRE NR_PT 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be expected WFMINPRE NR_PT might return WFMINPRE NR_PT 10000 indicating that there are 10000 data points in the expected incoming waveform record Sets or returns the point format of the
248. g that the oscilloscope is set to wait 5 video fields before rearming the trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 4 5 sets the oscilloscope to wait 4 5 video fields before rearming the trigger Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers Use the TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD command to actually trigger the oscilloscope on the line that you specify with this command This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 317 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger A VIDeo LINE lt NR1 gt TRIGger A VIDeo LINE TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD lt NR1 gt argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers The following table lists the valid choices depending on the active video standard Table 2 41 Video Line Numbering Ranges Video Standard Line Number Range 525 NTSC 1 525 625 PAL SECAM 1 625 SECAM 1 625 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 23 sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the line 23 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE might return TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 10 indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on line 10 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 318 Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger This command requires a DPO3VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity NEGative POSiti
249. ger where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RXSTArt RXDATA RXENDPacket TXSTArt TXDATA TXENDPacket TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 281 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for a RS232 Trigger if the trigger condition is RXDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition involves RX Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Tr
250. guments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the waveform label for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number 1 through 4 Bus BUS B lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt BUS B lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alpha numeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for bus lt x gt The text string is limited to 30 characters Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate lt NR1 gt is the LIN bit rate BUS BL LIN BITRATE 9600 sets the bit rate 9600 BUS B1 LIN BITRATE might return BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 2400 indicating the bit rate is set to 2400 BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat Group Sets or returns the LIN ID format Bus DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 71 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat NOPARity PARity BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat NOPARity sets the LIN id format to no parity PARity sets the LIN id format to parity BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT PARITY sets the LIN id format to parity BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT might return BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY indicating the LIN id format is no parity BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the LIN polarity Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity NORMal INVerted BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity NORMa specifies n
251. hat waveforms are saved using the internal format SAVe WAVEform GATIng 2 220 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform NONe or a specified portion of the waveform Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform GATIng NONe CURSors SCREEN SAVe WAVEform GATIng CURSors turns on cursors and the gates are the waveform record points at the cursor positions NONe saves the entire waveform SCREEN if zoom is on the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the zoom upper graticule otherwise the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the main graticule SAVE WAVEFORM GATING CURSOrs specifies that when the waveform gating is set to cursors save waveform operations should save the waveform points between the cursors If cursors are turned off waveform gating automatically reverts to NONE DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all search related settings Search SEARCH SEARCH might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 SPI COND SS DAT MOST VAL XXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIG A BUS B1 SPI DAT MISO VAL XXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 SPI DAT SIZ 1 SEARCH SEARCH1L TRIG A BUS B1 12C COND STAR DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE SEARCH SEARCHL TRIG A BUS B1 I12C ADDR MOD ADDR7 TYP USER
252. he Service Request Enable Register SRER using the SRE command When the operation is complete the oscilloscope will generate a Service Request The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 32 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices The SRQ when it comes interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique is efficient but requires sophisticated programming Using the OPC Query The OPC query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates an OPC message is complete A time out could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it The same command sequence using the OPC query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE DPO3000 Series Programmer
253. he hold time setting for an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A TYPe Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Groups Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt level for all channel waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold level for all math waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold level for all reference waveform searches Status and Error Command Group Use the commands in the Status and Error Command Group to determin
254. he mark on a reference waveform where lt x gt is the reference waveform number COLUMN deletes marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column MARK FREE Query Only Returns how many marks are available for use Group Mark Syntax MARK FREE MARK SELected END Query Only Returns the end of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected END 2 160 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK SELected FOCUS Query Only Returns the focus of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected FOCUS MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Query Only Returns the number of marks in the current zoom pixel column Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn MARK SELected OWNer Query Only Returns the owner of the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected OwNer Returns lt QString gt is the owner of the mark Examples MARK SELECTED OWNER might return USER SEARCH1 MARK SELected SOURCE Query Only Returns the source waveform for the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected SOURCE DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 161 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK SELected STARt Query Only Returns the starting point of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected STARt MARK SELected STATe Query Only Returns the on or off state of the
255. ht return MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default question mark unit MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 166 Sets or returns the units of the Spectral Magnification function in the math string Math MATH 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAr DB MATH 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear DB sets the SpectralMag units to decibels MATH1L SPECTRAL MAG DB sets the SpectralMag units for Math to decibels MATH1 SPECTRAL MAG might return MATH1 SPECTRAL MAG DB indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math are set to decibels DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Group Syntax Arguments Examples MATH 14 TYPe Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the window function for the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform A spectral window determines what the filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain It can be described by a mathematical function that is multiplied point by point times the input data to the spectral analyzer Math MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow RECTangu lar HAMming HANning BLAckmanharris MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow RECTangular window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one HAMming window function is based on a cosine series HANning window funct
256. ic settings TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Sets or returns the type of A trigger logic TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A logic trigger TRIGger A LOGIc INPut Returns the logic input values for all channels TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Specifies or returns the logic setting for the specified channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Sets the polarity of the clock channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime Returns the conditions for generating an A logic pattern trigger Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 39 Command Groups 2 40 Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or queries the logic trigger threshold voltage for the specified channel TR
257. ic pattern search to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 246 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc T
258. ical Order Arguments POSitive specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher specifies either positive or negative polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall SoUrce CH1 CH4 specifies one input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 256 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall WHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 WHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set volts second rate SLOWer sets the trigger to occ
259. ies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Group Syntax 2 244 Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIcC PATtern INPut MATH HIGH LOW xX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut MATH DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF lt x gt HIGH Low x SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF lt x gt HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to
260. igger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue lt Qstring gt is the binary data string to be used for the trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SiZe Conditions Group 2 282 Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition is TXDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in Bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves TX Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALUe lt Qstring gt is the binary data string to be used for the trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger condition for a SPI trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application modu
261. ile is invalid 2253 Reference error too many points received 2254 Reference error too few points received 2259 File too big 2270 Alias error 2271 Alias syntax error 2273 Illegal alias label 2276 Alias expansion error 2277 Alias redefinition not allowed 2278 Alias header not found 2285 TekSecure R Pass 2286 TekSecure R Fail 2500 Setup error file does not look like a setup file 2501 Setup warning could not recall all values from external setup 2620 Mask error too few points received DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Device Error System Event Execution Warning Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2760 Mark limit reached 2761 No mark present 2762 Search copy failed The following table lists the device errors that can occur during oscilloscope operation These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair Table 3 6 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3 Code Message 310 System error 311 Memory error 312 PUD memory lost 314 Save recall memory lost The following table lists the system event messages These messages are generated whenever certain system conditions occur Table 3 7 System Event Messages Code Message 400 Query event 401 Power on PON bit 7 set 402 Operation complete OPC bit 0 set 403 User request URQ bit 6 set 404 Power fail DDE bit 3 set 405 Req
262. ince the last statistical reset DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum Returns the minimum value found since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Sets or returns the channel from which measurements are taken MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Sets or returns the channel to which measurements are sent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated since the last statistical reset Sets or returns the measurement lt x gt type MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Returns measurement lt x gt units MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Returns the value of measurement lt x gt MEASUrement METHod Sets or returns the method used for calculating reference levels MEASUrement REFLevel Returns the current reference level parameters MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Sets or returns the top reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW Sets or returns the low reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID Sets or returns the mid reference level for measurements MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 Sets or retu
263. incoming waveform data Regardless of the argument used the scale offset and so on are interpreted similarly When ENV is used waveform data is interpreted over the min max pair when Y is used it is interpreted over a single point DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 335 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre PT_Off Group Syntax Arguments 2 336 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT_Fmt ENV Y WFMInpre PT_Fmt WFMOutpre PT_Fmt ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mode as maximum and minimum point pairs Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT Off Ynmax YZEro YMUIt ynmax YOFf Ynmin YZEro YMUIt ynmin YOFf Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted for each point in the waveform record Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT Off Yn YZEro YMUIt yn YOFf WFMINPRE PT_FMT ENV sets the incoming waveform data point format to enveloped WFMINPRE PT_FMT might return WFMINPRE PT_FMT ENV indicating that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 This command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer
264. indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at 64 mV Sets or returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSor HBArs UNIts BASE PERcent CURSor HBArs UNIts BASE selects the vertical units for the selected waveform PERcent selects ratio cursors CURSOR HBARS UNITS might return CURSOR HBARS UNITS BASE indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base CURSor HBArs USE No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale This command is only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSor HBArs USE CURrent FIVEdivs CURSor HBArs UNIts CURrent sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 0 is the current position of the lowest H Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the highest H Bar cursor DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 103 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CURSor MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples FIVEdivs sets H Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 2 5 divisions from the center horizontal graticule CURSOR HBARS USE FIVEDIVS sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions equals 100 Sets or returns whether the two cursors move linked together in unison or separately This applies to the Waveform cursors display mode This command is only applicable wh
265. ing acquisition with the ACQuire STATE RUN command This value is reset to zero when any acquisition horizontal or vertical arguments that affect the waveform are changed The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted is 232 1 Acquisition ACQui re NUMACq ACQuire STATE ACQuire NUMACq might return ACQUIRE NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire STATE RUN command Sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform Use the ACQuire MODe command to enable the Average mode Sending this command is equivalent to turning a multipurpose knob to enter the number of waveform acquisitions to average Acquisition ACQuire NUMAVg lt NR1 gt ACQui re NUMAVg ACQuire MODe lt NR1 gt is the number of waveform acquisitions to average The range of values is from 2 to 512 in powers of two ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 specifies that 16 waveform averages will be performed before exponential averaging starts ACQUIRE NUMAVG might return ACQUIRE NUMAVG 64 indicating that there are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 55 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ACQuire STOPAfter 2 56 Group Starts or stops acquisitions When state is set to ON or RUN a new acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was a single acquisitio
266. ion involves TX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for SPI triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for the SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or returns the source for a bus trigger TRIGger A EDGE Returns the source coupling and source for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Groups Command Description TRIGger A HOLDoff Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time TRIGger A LEVel Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger TRIGger A LEVel AUXin Sets or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Specifies or returns the trigger level for the specified trigger channel TRIGger A LOGIc Returns all A trigger log
267. ion for saving the current front panel setup The front panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10 Using an out of range value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten SAVE SETUP 5 saves the current oscilloscope setup in memory location 5 SAVE SETUP TEK00000 SET saves the current oscilloscope setup in the file TEK00000 SET in the current working directory SAVe WAVEform No Query Form 2 218 Group Syntax Related Commands This command saves a specified waveform or all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms Only individual analog waveforms CH lt x gt MATH and REF lt x gt can be saved to reference memory locations You can save all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to a single CSV file when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET You can save all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to consecutive ISF internal save format files when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to INTERNAL Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform lt wfm gt REF lt x gt lt wfm gt lt QString gt ALL lt Qstring gt RECAII WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt wfm gt lt REF lt x gt gt saves the specified waveform to the specified reference memory location lt wfm gt can be any live analog channel
268. ion is based on a cosine series BLAckmanharris window function is based on a cosine series MATHL SPECTRAL WINDOW HANNING applies a Hanning window to the spectral analyzer input data MATH1 SPECTRAL WINDOW might return MATH1 SPECTRAL WINDOW HAMMING indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data is the Hamming window Sets or returns the math waveform mode type Math MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced DUAL FFT MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced sets the math waveform mode to advanced math DUAL sets the math waveform mode to dual waveform math FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT math DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 167 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MATH TYPE FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT MATH TYPE FFT MATH DEFINE FFTC CH1 sets the math type to FFT and displays an FFT waveform of the channel 1 waveform using the current FFT scale and window settings MATH TYPE ADVANCED MATH DEFINE INTGCREF1 CH3 DELAY CH1 CH2 sets the math type to FFT and displays an advanced math waveform that is the integration of the product of REF1 and CH3 plus the result of the delay measurement between channel 1 and 2 MATH 1 VERTical POSition Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the vertical position of the currently selected math type Math MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical POSition
269. is the bottom of the screen SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to PCs Table 2 35 DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre Settings Setting ENCdg BN_Fmt BYT_Or BYT_NR ASCii ASC N A N A 1 2 FAStest BIN RI MSB 1 2 RIBinary BIN RI MSB 1 2 RPBinary BIN RP MSB 1 2 SRIbinary BIN RI LSB 1 2 SRPbinary BIN RP LSB 1 2 DATA ENCDG might return DATa ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the outgoing waveform data DATA ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first Sets or returns the location of the waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope by the CURVe query DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa STARt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Waveform Transfer DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 DATa SOUrce CURVe CH1 CH4 specifies which analog channel data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller channels
270. ith the first argument to the state specified with the second argument The commands and states are unique to the attached probe type Only certain VPI probes support this command See the probe documentation for how to set these string arguments Vertical AUXin PRObe COMMAND lt QString gt lt QString gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt QString gt are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in the probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXIN PROBE COMMAND OUTPUT ON turns the output of a Tektronix VPI DPG probe on AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4V1MHz sets a Tektronix VPI DPG probe to the 4 4V1MHz mode AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE might return AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4V1MHZ AUXin PRObe DEGAUss No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a Tek VPI current probe attached to the Aux In input If you send this command to a probe that does not support this function it is ignored Vertical AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute EXECute starts a probe degauss cycle AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS EXECUTE degausses the probe attached to the Aux In input AUXin PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the state of the probe degauss NEEDED RECOMMENDED PASSED FAILED RUNNING The command will return PASSED for probes
271. ither You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands For example to set the trigger level to 50 you could use TRIGger A SETLevel To force a trigger you could use TRIGger FORCe Group Miscellaneous Syntax LOCk ALL NONe LOCk DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 157 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples LRN Query Only 2 158 Group Syntax Related Commands Examples UNLock ALL disables all front panel controls NONe enables all front panel controls This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL command LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls LOCK might return LOCK NONE indicating that the front panel controls are enabled by this command Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration information for the calibration values the WFMInpre query and the WFMOutpre query This query allows you to record or learn the current oscilloscope settings You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the LRN query This command is identical to the SET Command Miscellaneous LRN SET LRN might return a long response part of which could be as follows ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV INFINITE NUMAVG 16 SAMPLINGMODE RT HEADER 1 LOCK NONE LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERBOSE 1 ALIAS STATE 0 D
272. its curve_in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro_in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YOFf Group Syntax Related Commands Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YMUIt lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YMU1t DATa DESTination WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMInpre YUNit lt NR3 gt is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points WFMINPRE YMULT might return WFMINPRE YMULT 40 0000E 3 which if YUNit is V indicates that the vertical scale is 40 mV digitizing level 1 V div for 8 bit data WFMINPRE YMULT 20E 3 specifies that if WFMInpre YUNit is V and WFMInpre BYT_Nr is 1 the vertical scale is 20 mV digitizing level 500 mV div Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical position of the waveform YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve_in_dl is a data point in CURVe value_in units curve_in_dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro_in_units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have t
273. l and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Group Miscellaneous Syntax AUTOSet EXECute UNDo Arguments EXECute autosets the displayed waveform UNDo restores the oscilloscope settings to those present prior to the autoset execution Examples AUTOSET EXECUTE vertical horizontal and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to AUXin Query Only Group Syntax automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Returns all auxiliary input parameters Vertical AUXin DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 61 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin PRObe Group Syntax Examples Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxilary input Vertical AUXin PRObe AUXin PRObe AUXIN PROBE might return AUXIN PROBE ID TYPE No Probe Detected SERNUMBER AUXIN PROBE UNITS RESISTANCE 1 0000E 6 giving information about the probe attached to the AUX In input AUXin PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the Tek VPI probe attached to the Aux In input to autozero The oscilloscope will ignore this command if the Auxiliary input does not have a Tek VPI probe connected to it Vertical AUXin PRObe AUTOZero EXECute EXECute sets the probe to autozero AUXin PROBE AUTOZERO EXECUTE AUXin PRObe COMMAND No Query Form Group Syntax 2 62 Sets the state of the probe control specified w
274. l have been generated Sets or returns the time that the oscilloscope displays Miscellaneous TIME lt QString gt TIME DATE lt QString gt is a time in the form hh mm ss where hh refers to a two digit hour number mm refers to a two digit minute number from 00 to 59 and ss refers to a two digit second number from 00 to 59 TIME 14 00 00 sets the time to exactly 2 00 p m TIME might return TIME 14 05 17 indicating the current time is set to 2 05 p m and 17 seconds TOTaluptime Query Only Group Syntax 2 266 This command returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been powered on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed usually since the initial manufacturing process Miscellaneous TOoTaluptime DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRG No Query Form Performs a group execute trigger on commands defined by DDT Group Miscellaneous Syntax TRG Related Commands DDT Examples TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by DDT TRIGger No Query Form Forces a trigger event to occur Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger FORCe TRIGger Arguments FORCE creates a trigger event If TRIGger STATE is set to READy the acquisition will complete Otherwise this command will be ignored Examples TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur TRIGger A Sets the A trigger level automatically to 50 of the range
275. l position of the currently selected math type MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Returns the math waveform vertical units 2 24 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 24 Math Commands cont Command Description MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or non live math reference waveforms MATH 1 TYPe Sets or returns the math waveform mode type MATHVAR Returns all numerical values used within math expressions MATHVAR VAR lt x gt Sets or returns numerical values you can use within math expressions Measurement Command Group Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated measurement system Up to four automated measurements can be displayed on the screen In the commands these measurement readouts are named MEAS lt x gt where lt x gt is the measurement number In addition to the four displayed measurements the measurement commands let you specify an additional measurement I MMed The immediate measurement has no front panel equivalent Immediate measurements are never displayed Because they are computed only when needed immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements use the VALue query to obtain measurement results Measurement
276. le Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS MISO MOST MISOMOST TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition SS specifies the Slave Selection condition MISO specifies the Master In Slave Out condition MOST specifies the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOST specifies the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 283 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MISO or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALUue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALUue lt QString gt is the binary data string where the number of bits is 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOST VALUe lt QString gt TRIGger
277. le of non internal formats The oscilloscope saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix with the first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data The values specified by DATa STARt and DATa STOP determine the range of waveform data to output In the event that DATa STOP value is greater than the current record length the current record length determines the last output value Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal SPREADSheet SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 219 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt INTERNal specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format using a isf filename extension These files can be recalled as reference waveforms When this argument is specified the settings specified via the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands have no meaning as the entire waveform is saved SPREADSheet specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains comma delimited values These waveform data files are named using the csv filename extension Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet programs to import the data SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL specifies that the internal file format is the format used for saving waveforms SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT might return SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL indicating t
278. lity Page 3 Select I O with the Multipurpose knob 4 Push USB and verify that USB is enabled 5 If USB is not enabled push Enabled on the side bezel menu After connection the host will list the oscilloscope as a USB device with the following parameters See Table 1 1 Table 1 1 USB Device Parameters Parameter Value Manufacturer ID 0x0699 decimal 1689 Product ID 0x0411 decimal 1040 DPO3012 0x0411 decimal 1041 DPO3014 0x0412 decimal 1042 DPO3032 0x0413 decimal 1043 DPO3034 0x0414 decimal 1044 DPO3052 0x0415 decimal 1045 DPO3054 Serial number Serial number Manufacturer description Tektronix Interface description USBTMC USB488 To use GPIB start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2 0 high speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope Connect the other end to the TEK USB 488 Adapter host port Then connect a GPIB cable from the TEK USB 488 Adapter to your PC DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started Supply power to the Adapter in either of these two ways 1 Use the optional 5 Vpc power adapter connected to the 5 Vpc power input on the Adapter 2 Use an appropriate USB cable connected to a powered USB host port on your PC and the Device port on the TEK USB 488 Adapter The oscilloscope has a USB 2 0 high speed device port to control the oscilloscope through USBTMC or GPIB with a TEK USB 488 Adapter The USBTMC protocol allows USB de
279. llowed by an alphabetic character as an escaped character and as such interpret that alphabetic character as a control character For example the sequence n may be interpreted as a newline character t may be interpreted as a tab character To ensure that this interpretation does not occur you can use double back slashes For example E testfile txt 2 20 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 20 File System Commands Command Groups Command Description FILESystem Returns the file system state FILESystem CWD Sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem commands FILESystem DELEte Deletes a named file or directory FILESystem DIR Returns a list of directory contents FILESystem FORMat Formats a named drive FILESystem FREESpace Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive FILESystem MKDir Creates a new directory FILESystem READFile Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface FILESystem REName FILESystem RMDir Assigns a new name to an existing file Deletes a named directory FILESystem WRITEFile Writes the specified block data to the oscilloscope current working directory Hard Copy Command Group Use the commands in the Hard Copy Command Group to make hard copies Table 2 21 Hard Copy Commands Command Description HARDCopy Sends a copy of the screen display to the selected printer H
280. ls the display of the message window on the screen Display MESSage STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MESSage STATE MESSage BOX MESSage SHOW MESSage CLEAR OFF or lt NR1 gt O removes the message window from the screen ON or lt NR1 gt O displays the message window and its contents on the screen NEWpass No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands This command changes the password that enables access to password protected data The PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command or an execution error will be generated Miscellaneous NEWpass lt QString gt PUD PASSWord DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 205 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OPC 2 206 Arguments Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Examples lt QString gt is the new password which can contain up to 16 characters NEWPASS mypassword creates a new password mypassword for accessing your protected data Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the output queue when all such OPC commands are complete The OPC response is not available to read until all pending operations finish See page 3 1 Status and Events The OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program
281. lso set this bit 6 URQ User Request Indicates that an application event has occurred See note 5 CME Command Error Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query 4 EXE Execution Error Shows that an error executing a command or query 3 DDE Device Error Shows that a device error occurred 2 QYE Query Error Either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending or that data in the Output Queue was lost 1 RQC Request Control This is not used 0 LSB OPC Operation Complete Shows that the operation is complete This bit is set when all pending operations complete following an OPC command The Status Byte Register SBR Records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the oscilloscope requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll or the STB query to read the contents of the SBR The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Output Queue When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the RQS bit When you use the STB query to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the MSS bit Reading the SBR does not clear the bits 6 7 ROS 5 l4 3 J2 1 JO l6 ESB MV Mss Figure 3 2 The Status Byte Register SBR Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions
282. lt x gt 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt 2 245 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 245 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 247 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH 2 247 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt 2 247 Index 6 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 248 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH 2 248 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 248 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity 2 249 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUtce 2 249 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn 2 249 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 250 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 250 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT S
283. m a copy of the settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command Save and Recall RECA11 SETUp FACtory lt NR1 gt lt file path gt FACtory RCL RST SAV SAVe SETUp FILESystem CWD FACtory restores the factory setup lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 1 to 10 which specifies a saved setup storage location lt file path gt specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and one or lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will read the file from the default directory see FILESystem CWD lt filename gt stands for a filename the use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended RECALL SETUP FACTORY recalls and makes current the oscilloscope setup to its factory defaults RECALL SETUP 2 recalls the oscilloscope setup from setup storage location 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 209 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RECALL SETUP TEKOO000 SET recalls the setup from the file TEK00000 SET in the default directory for setups E TekScope setups RECAII WAVEform No Query Form This command no query form recalls a stored waveform to a reference location Group Save and Recall Syntax RECA11 wAVEform
284. mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column or all marks MARK FREE Returns how many marks are free to be used MARK SELected END Returns the end of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected FOCUS MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Returns the focus of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform Returns how many marks are in the current zoom pixel column MARK SELected OWNer Returns the owner of the selected mark MARK SELected SOURCE Returns the source waveform of the selected mark MARK SELected STARt Returns the start of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected STATe Returns the on or off state of the selected MARK SELected ZOOm POSition mark Returns the position of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the upper window MARK TOTal Returns how many marks are used DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 23 Command Groups Math Command Group Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define a math waveform Use the available math functions to define your math waveform The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression If you change these sources the math waveform you previously defined will be affected Math expressions can be simple containing no mathematical computation such as CH1 which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of Channel 1
285. me used in calculating the transition value DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 41 Command Groups 2 42 Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source for transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Sets or returns the relationship of delta time to transitioning signal TRIGger A TYPe Sets or returns the type of A trigger TRIGger A VIDeo Returns the video parameters for the A trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE Sets or returns the video trigger format TRIGger A VIDeo CUS Tom LINEPeriod Sets or queries the line period TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCInterval Sets or queries the sync interval TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Sets or returns the HDTV video signal format on which to trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Sets or returns the polarity of the video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Sets or returns the
286. ments Sets or returns the condition for a RS232 trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RXSTArt RXDATA RXENDPacket TXSTArt TXDATA TXENDPacket SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDi tion RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SiZe Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RS232 trigger search if the trigger condition is RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 235 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa S1Ze lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in Bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALu
287. meters The user should always follow acquisition parameter changes with a single sequence OPC command prior to CURVe to ensure the return data reflects the new acquisition parameters The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope The data is stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa DESTination starting with the data point specified by DATa STARt Only one waveform can be transferred at a time The waveform will only be displayed if the reference is displayed NOTE Transferring large volumes of data to or from the oscilloscope takes time ASCII waveform transfer is very inefficient Group Waveform Transfer Syntax CURVe lt Block gt lt asc curve gt DIGtal CURVe Related Commands DATa DESTination DATa SOUrce DATa STARt DATa STOP WFMInpre WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre HEADer Arguments lt Block gt is the waveform data in binary format The waveform is formatted as lt x gt lt yyy gt lt data gt lt newline gt where lt x gt is the number of y bytes For example if lt yyy gt 500 then lt x gt 3 lt yyy gt is the number of bytes to transfer if samples are one or two bytes wide Use the WFMInpre BYT_ Nr command to set the width for waveforms transferred into the oscilloscope Use WFMOutpre BYT Nr to set the width for waveforms transferred out from the oscilloscope lt data gt is the curve data lt newline gt is a single byte new line character at the end of the data
288. mmands Examples Returns the current B trigger events parameter Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGGER B EVENTS might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B LEVel 2 324 Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger when TRIG DELay BY is set to EVENTS Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt lt NR1 gt TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger B EVENTS lt NR1 gt is the number of B trigger events which can range from 1 to 5 000 000 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 4 specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger events after the A trigger TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B trigger can occur Sets or returns the level for the B trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger B LEVel TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LEVel TRIGger A LEVel TRIGger B TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the B trigger level in volts TRIGGER B LEVEL TTL sets the B trigger level to 1 4 V TRIGGER B LEVEL might return TRIGGER B LEVEL 173 0000E 03 indicating that the
289. mp DiSplay GRAticule Sets or returns the type of graticule that is displayed DlSplay FORMat Sets or returns the display format DiSplay INTENSITy Returns all display intensity settings DiSplay INTENSITy BACKLight Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the display DiSplay INTENSITy GRAticule Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the display DiSplay INTENSITy WAVEform Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms DlSplay PERSistence Sets or returns display persistence setting DiSplay STYle DOTsonly Sets a dots only display MESSage BOX Sets or returns the size and position of the message window MESSage CLEAR Removes the message text from the message window MESSage SHOW Clears the contents of the message window MESSage STATE Controls the display of the message window Ethernet Command Group Use the commands in the Ethernet Command Group to set up the Ethernet remote interface Table 2 19 Ethernet Commands Command Description ETHERnet DHCPbootp Sets or returns the network initialization search fora DHCP BOOTP server ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server Dns IP address ETHERnet DOMAINname Sets or returns the network domain name ETHERnet ENET ADDress Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP addre
290. mples Returns the date when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel lt x gt Save and Recall SETUP lt x gt DATE SETUP4 DATE might return SETUP4 DATE 04 18 06 which is the setup date for channel 4 Sets or returns the setup label for the specified channel lt x gt Save and Recall SETUP lt x gt LABEL lt Qstring gt lt Qstring gt is an alpha numeric string of characters enclosed in quotes that defines the label text for SETUP lt x gt The length of the string is limited to 30 characters SETUP LABEL might return SETUPL LABEL TEST 2 whichis the label setup for channel 1 SETUP lt x gt TIME Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the time when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel lt gt Save and Recall SETUP lt x gt TIME SETUP2 TIME might return SETUP2 TIME 15 24 07 which is the setup time for channel 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 263 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SRE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples STB Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples 2 264 The SRE Service Request Enable command sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register For information refer to Registers Status and Error SRE lt NR1 gt SRE CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory STB lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 0 through 255
291. mples Returns waveform transmission and formatting parameters for the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce command If the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command is not displayed the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters BYT_Nr BIT_Nr ENCdg BN_ Fmt BYT_Or Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre WFMOUTPRE might return the waveform formatting data as WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 2 BIT_NR 16 ENCDG ASCII BN_FMT RI BYT_OR MSB WFID Ch1 DC coupling 100 0mV div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode NR_PT 10000 PT_FMT Y XUNIT s XINCR DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 341 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BN_Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 342 4 0000E 9 XZERO 20 0000E 6 PT_OFF O YUNIT V YMULT 15 6250E 6 YOFF 6 4000E 3 YZERO 0 0000 Sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain as specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing the value of WFMOutpre BIT_Nr also changes the values of WFMOutpre BYT_Or and Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BIT_Nr lt NR1 gt wFMOutpre BIT_Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt lt NR1 gt is the number of bits per data point and can be 8 or 16 WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for outgoing waveforms WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR might return WFMOUTPRE BIT_NR 8 indica
292. n argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width than the time set by the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQua l argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width greater than or less than but not equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN THAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the oscilloscope detects a runt of any detectable width DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 303 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the width for a runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth TRIGger A RUNT WHEn lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum width in seconds TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 15E 6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A RUNT WI
293. n sequence a new single sequence acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was continuous a new continuous acquisition will be started If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition for example averaging or enveloping the acquisition sequence is restarted and any accumulated data is discarded Also the oscilloscope resets the number of acquisitions If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode acquisition continues Acquisition ACQui re STATE OFF ON RUN STOP lt NR1 gt ACQuire STATE ACQuire STOPA fter OFF stops acquisitions STOP stops acquisitions ON starts acquisitions RUN starts acquisitions lt NR1 gt 0 stops acquisitions any other value starts acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count of the number of acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE might return ACQUIRE STATE O indicating that the acquisition is stopped Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope continually acquires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence Acquisition DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ALlas Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTop SEQuence ACQuire STOPAfter ACQuire STATE RUNSTOp specifies that the oscilloscope will continually acquire data if ACQuire STATE is turned on SEQuence
294. n use within math expressions Group Math Syntax MATHVAR Related Commands Returns Examples MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 DEFine lt NR3 gt are the stored numerical values MATHVAR returns the values of all variables stored in locations 1 through 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 169 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATHVAR VAR lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns one of two different numerical values you can use within math expressions These values can range from 10 0e 18 to 1 0e 15 the default values are 0 0 lt x gt specifies the location 1 or 2 in which you can store values Stored math variables can be referenced within math expressions as VARI and VAR2 For example the following command defines MATHI as the product of Channel 1 and math variable 1 MATH1 DEFINE CH1 VARI Math MATHVAR VAR lt x gt lt NR3 gt MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 DEFine lt NR3 gt specifies the numerical value to be stored in location x lt 1 through 2 gt MATHVAR VAR2 2 43E 5 stores the value 2 43e 5 in the second math variable location MATHVAR VAR2 might return MATHVAR VAR2 24 3000E 6 for the expression stored in location 2 MEASUrement Query Only 2 170 Group Syntax Examples Returns all measurement parameters Measurement MEASUrement MEASUREMENT might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY
295. nd EQUal places a mark if the pulse width is equal to the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command within a tolerance of 5 UNEQual places a mark if the pulse width is unequal to the time the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command within a tolerance of 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a pulse width trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth wWIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth wIDth lt NR3 gt is the pulse width SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 250 Group Syntax Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order POSitive places a mark when the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge re crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative places a mark when the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge re crosses the high threshold
296. nd hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETHOId DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa THReshold DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 307 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the setup and hold data level in V TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset high level of 1 4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that 1 2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHO1d HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 3 0E 3 sets the hold time for the setup and hold trigger to 3 ms TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Sy
297. nd horizontal positioning and scaling of the display ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Specifies or returns a trace as zoomed on or off DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns the following current acquisition parameters m Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of averages Sampling mode Acquisition ACQuire ACQuire MODe ACQuire NUMACq ACQuire NUMAV g ACQuire STOPA fter ACQuire MAXSamplerate Query Only Group Syntax Examples ACQuire MODe Returns the maximum real time sample rate which varies from model to model Acquisition ACQuire MAXSamplerate ACQUIRE MAXSAMPLERATE might return 2 5000E 9 in a DPO3034 indicating the maximum real time sample rate is 2 5GS s Sets or returns the acquisition mod
298. nds Arguments Returns Examples Returns a list of quoted strings Each string contains the name of a file or directory in the current working directory File System FILESystem DIR FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir None FILESystem DIR returns a list of files and directories in the current working directory FILESYSTEM DIR might return FILESYSTEM DIR tek00000 png my_CAN_setup set Savedwfml isf myImages FILESystem FORMat No Query Form Group Formats a mass storage device This command should be used with extreme caution as it causes all data on the specified mass storage device to be lost Drive letters e g E are case sensitive and must be upper case For all other FILESYSTEM commands drives letters are not case sensitive Example FILES FORMAT E Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope s front panel USB port File System DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 139 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax FILESystem FORMat Arguments lt drive name gt is a quoted string that defines the disk drive to format Examples FILESYSTEM FORMAT E Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope s front panel USB port FILESystem FREESpace Query Only Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive Group File System Syntax FILESystem FREESpace Related Commands _FILESystem FREESpace FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir No Query Form
299. nels to be true when all conditions are true TRIGger A LOGIc INPut Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the logic input values for all channels If a clock channel is defined it returns the clock source and edge Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CHL HIGH CH2 X CH3 X indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while channel 2 and channel three are don t care TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 292 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the logical input condition for the channel specified by lt x gt Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 might return TRIGGER LOGIC INPUT CH1 X indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does not matter TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for channel 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Sets the polarity of the clock channel Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifie
300. nsfer waveform preamble information using the WFMOutpre query Transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope using the CURVe query You can transfer waveforms to the oscilloscope from an external controller using the following sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Specify the reference waveform using DATa DESTination Specify the record length of the reference waveform using WFMPre NR_ Pt Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre ENCdg Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMInpre BYT_Nr Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa STARt Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre Transfer waveform data to the oscilloscope using CURVe Table 2 32 Waveform Transfer Commands Command Description CURVe The command format transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope reference waveform specified by DATa DESTination The query format transfers waveform data from oscilloscope specified by the DATa SOUrce command DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe Command Or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 49 Command Groups 2 50 Table 2 32 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description DATa DESTination Sets or returns the reference waveform for storing waveform data sent to the oscilloscope DATa E
301. nt channel Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in percent MEASUrement SNAPShot No Query Form Displays the measurement snapshot list on the oscilloscope screen The list contains the immediate values for all available measurements of the active signal Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement SNAPShot MEASUrement STATIstics No Query Form Clears all of the statistics accumulated for all periodic measurements MEAS1 through MEAS4 The query form returns statistic settings Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement STATIstics RESET MEASUrement STATIStics Arguments RESET clears the measurements MEASUrement STATIstics MODE Controls the operation and display of management statistics DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 199 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Measurement MEASUrement STATIStics MODE OFF ON MEASUrement STATISticCs MODE MEASUrement STATIstics OFF turns all measurements off This is the default value ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE OFF turns statistic measurements off MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ON indicating that measurement statistics are turned on and all statis
302. ntax Arguments 2 308 Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOId SETTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOId SETTime lt NR3 gt specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 3 0E 6 specifies that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 3 us TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD SETTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or queries the threshold for the channel specified by x Affects all trigger types using the channel Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETHOId THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHO1d THReshold CH lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 1 5 sets the channel 1 threshold to 1 5 volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 0E 0 indicating the channel 1 threshold is set to 0 0 volts TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Query Only Returns transition time trigger parameters Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 Related Commands
303. o backwards Mid Ref crossing 2212 Measurement error No negative crossing 2213 Measurement error No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error No crossing target waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2215 Measurement error No crossing second waveform 2216 Measurement error No crossing target waveform 2217 Measurement error Constant waveform 2219 Measurement error No valid edge No arm sample 2220 Measurement error No valid edge No arm cross 2221 Measurement error No valid edge No trigger cross 2222 Measurement error No valid edge No second cross 2223 Measurement error Waveform mismatch 2224 Measurement error WAIT calculating 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 2226 Measurement error Null Waveform 2227 Measurement error Positive and Negative Clipping 2228 Measurement error Positive Clipping 2229 Measurement error Negative Clipping 2230 Measurement error High Ref lt Low Ref 2231 Measurement error No statistics available 2233 Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable 2235 Math error invalid math description 2240 Invalid password 2241 Waveform requested is invalid 2244 Source waveform is not active 2245 Saveref error selected channel is turned off 2250 Reference error the reference waveform f
304. o be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YOFf lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YOFf WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMInpre YMUIt WFMOutpre YOFf DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 339 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples WFMinpre YUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YZEro 2 340 lt NR3 gt is the vertical offset in digitizing levels WFMINPRE YOFF 50 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions for 8 bit data above the center of the data range WFMINPRE YOFF might return WFMINPRE YOFF 25 indicating the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform Supported units are Hz A A A A V A W A dB A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YUNit lt QString gt WFMInpre YUNit WFMOutpre YUNit lt QString gt contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform WFMINPRE YUNIT might return WFMINPRE YUNIT V indicating the vertical units
305. ocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 100 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models LOW measures the Low reference 0 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models MAXimum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NEDGECount is the count of falling edges NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude x 100 NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses Nw
306. of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal The query returns current A trigger parameters The trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event This command works for the following cases Edge Trigger when source is Not Line Logic Trigger when Clock Source is not Off or Logic Pattern is Don t Care and Pulse Width Trigger Group Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 267 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 268 Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger A SETLevel TRIGger A TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGger A PULse SETLevel sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGGER A SETLEVEL sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGGER A might return a long response with A trigger parameters some of which could be as follows TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 8 00 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 Q0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 C
307. old Returns settings for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Returns clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Sets or returns the hold time for the setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or queries the threshold for the channel TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Returns the delta time polarity and both upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISE Fall DELTatime Sets or returns the delta ti
308. olon is required Never use the beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star lt Mnemonic gt This is a header subfunction Some command headers have only one mnemonic If a command header has multiple mnemonics a colon character always separates them from each other lt Argument gt This is a quantity quality restriction or limit associated with the header Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple arguments A lt space gt separates arguments from the header A lt comma gt separates arguments from each other lt Comma gt A single comma is used between arguments of multiple argument commands Optionally there may be white space characters before and after the comma lt Space gt A white space character is used between a command header and the related argument Optionally a white space may consist of multiple white space characters Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of the settings Commands have the structure lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Comma gt lt Argument gt A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical or tree structure The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level The leading colon always returns
309. ols that are used Table 2 1 Symbols for Backus Naur Form Symbol Meaning lt gt Defined element Is defined as Exclusive OR Group one element is required Optional can be omitted Previous element s may be repeated Comment Command and Query Structure Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually called commands and queries Commands modify oscilloscope settings or tell the oscilloscope to perform a specific action Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and status information Most commands have both a set form and a query form The query form of the command differs from the set form by its question mark at the end For example the set command ACQui re MODe has a query form ACQuire MODe Not all commands have both a set and a query form Some commands have set only and some have query only Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query Command messages may contain five element types defined in the following table DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 1 Command Syntax Commands Table 2 2 Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning lt Header gt This is the basic command name If the header ends with a question mark the command is a query The header may begin with a colon character If the command is concatenated with other commands the beginning c
310. olute volts MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for the specified channel in percent Miscellaneous Command Group 2 28 Use the commands in the Miscellaneous Command Group to perform actions that do not fit into other categories Several commands and queries are common to all 488 2 1987 devices The 488 2 1987 standard defines these commands The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands Command Description AUTOSet Sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls to provide a stable display of the selected waveform CLEARMenu Clears the current menu from the display DATE Sets or returns the date displayed by the oscilloscope DDT Sets or returns the commands that will be executed by the group execute trigger FPAnel PRESS Simulates the action of pressing a specified front panel button FPAnel TURN Duplicates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob GPIBUsb ADDress Returns the current GPIB address GPIBUsb ID Returns the identification string of the connected adaptor module and firmware version HEADer Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands cont Command Description ID Returns identifying information about the oscillo
311. om Command Group 2 52 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt FACtor 2 352 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition 2 352 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 353 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition 2 353 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt SCAle 2 354 ZOOm ZOOMKx gt STATE 2 354 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt 2 352 ZOOm 2 351 ZOOm MODe STATE 2 351 Index 9
312. ommand or the front panel BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232C parity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity NONe EVEN ODD BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity NONE specifies no parity EVEN specifies even parity ODD specifies odd parity BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity Conditions Group Syntax 2 76 Sets or returns the RS232C polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments NORMal sets the RS232C bus polarity to positive INVERTed sets the RS232C bus polarity to negative BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS232 RX source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt X gt RS232C RX SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt X gt RS232C RX SOUrce Arguments CH1 CH4 specifies the channel to use for the RS232 RX source BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS232 TX Source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO3COMP application module Group Bus Syntax
313. ommand will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre XUNit DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE XUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE XUNIT HZ indicating that the horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz WFMOutpre XZEro Query Only 2 348 Returns the time coordinate of the first point in the outgoing waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This value is in units of WFMOutpre XUNit The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre XZEro DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XZERO might return WFMOUTPRE XZERO 5 6300E 9 indicating that the trigger occurred 5 63 ns before the first sample in the waveform record WFMOutpre YMUIt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level in units specified by WFMOutpre Y UNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on See the description of WFMInpre YMUIt to see how this scale factor is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YMU1t DATa SOUrce WFMInpre YMUIt
314. ommands Listed in Alphabetical Order OVER A DB WATTS DB OVER W DB SQUARED DB OVER DB VOLTS SEC AMPS SEC WATTS SEC V OVER S A OVER S W OVER S Measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNItS MEASUREMENT IMMED UNITS might return MEASUREMENT IMMED UNIts s indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds MEASUrement IMMed VALue Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the value of the measurement specified by the MEASUrement MMed TYPe command The measurement is immediately taken on the source s specified by a MEASUrement MMed SOUrce command NOTE A change to HORizontal MAIn SCALe or CH lt x gt SCALe will not necessarily have taken affect if immediately followed by this command Measurement MEASUrement IMMed VALue MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MMed SOUrce ESR ALLEv MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 9 9000E 37 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item is added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement INDICators Query Only Group Returns all measurement indicator parameters Measurement DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 179 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Examples MEASUrement INDICators MEASUREMENT INDICATORS might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS1 NUMHORZ O NUMVER
315. on Conditions Group Sets or returns the search condition for an I2C trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 229 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATStart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C CONDition STARt specifies a search based on a start condition STOP specifies a search based on a stop condition REPEATStart specifies a search based on a repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on a missing acknowledgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on an address DATA specifies a search based on a data condition ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on an address and data condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DiRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C search condition to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection
316. on off state of bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B lt x gt STATE SELect BUS lt x gt ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the bus OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the bus Sets or returns the bus type for lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt TYPE 12C SPI CAN RS232C BUS B lt x gt TYPE I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus not available on two channel models CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus RS232C specifies the RS232C bus 2 81 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the lower threshold for each channel This applies to all search and trigger types that use the channel This command supersedes the BUS THResho ld CH lt x gt above Bus BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 TTL sets the CH1 lower threshold to 800mV BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 might return BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 indicating the CH1 lower threshold is 800 mV BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 82 Sets or returns the threshold for
317. or is positioned 3 72 us before the trigger point MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Returns all measurement parameters for the specified active measurement lt x gt Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Values may be ignored if they generated an error Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNT MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT 3247 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Query Only Group Syntax 2 182 Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT MEAS1 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking a delay measurement Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection BACKWards
318. or of 100 ms div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 10 00 kHz div will always be four digits The examples cover all known internal units Record Length A string containing the number of waveform 1000 points points available in the entire record The 1000000 points numeric portion is given as an integer Acquisition Mode A string describing the mode used to acquire Sample mode the waveform Pk Detect mode Envelope mode Average mode DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 347 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples WFMOUTPRE WFID might return WFMOUTPRE WFID Ch1 DC coupling 100 0mvolts div 500 0us div 1000 points Sample mode WFMOutpre XINcr Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This value corresponds to the sampling interval The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre XINcr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XINCR might return WFMOUTPRE XINCR 10 0000E 6 indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 us point WFMOutpre XUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query c
319. or returns the search condition for a LIN B lt x gt LIN CONDition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the binary data string B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the binary data string used B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue for a LIN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN Dentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Command Groups Commands Description SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the trigger condition for a B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RS232 trigger SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa S Ze for a RS232 RX trigger SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for a RX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue TRIGger
320. orm and defined the measurement you want to take and display You select the measurement using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 command You define the measurement type using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe command Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE Related Commands MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Arguments OFF disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot ON enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot lt NR1 gt 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot any other value enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE ON computes and displays the measurement defined as measurement 2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev Query Only Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by lt x gt the measurement slots from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 187 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV 21
321. ormal LIN polarity INVerted specifies inverted LIN polarity BUS B1 LIN POLARITY INVERTED sets the LIN polarity to INVERTED BUS B1 LIN POLARITY might return BUS B1 LIN POLARITY NORMAL indicating the LIN polarity is normal BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Group Syntax Arguments 2 72 Sets or returns the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt is the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 10 sets the sample point is at 10 of the bit period BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT might return BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 indicating that the sample point is at 50 of the bit period Sets or returns the LIN data source Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies the LIN source channel where x is to 4 BUS B1L LIN SOURCE CH4 sets the LIN source to channel 4 BUS B1 LIN SOURCE might return BUS B1 LIN SOURCE CH1 indicating the LIN source is channel 1 BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the LIN standard Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard v1x V2XxX MIXed BUS B lt X gt LIN STANDard V1x sets th
322. oscope ground The channel is specified by lt x gt There is also a corresponding query that requests the termination parameter and translates this enumeration into one of the two float values Vertical DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt VOLts Group Syntax Arguments CH lt x gt YUNits Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt TERmination FIFty SEVENTYFive MEG lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt TERmination FIFty sets the channel lt x gt input resistance to 50 Q SEVENTYF ive sets the channel lt x gt input resistance to 75 Q MEG sets the channel lt x gt input resistance to 1 MQ lt NR3 gt specifies the channel lt x gt input resistance numerically CH4 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 establishes 50 Q impedance on channel 4 CH2 TERMINATION might return CH2 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 indicating that channel 2 is set to 50 Q impedance Sets or returns the vertical sensitivity for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt VOLts lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt VOLts lt NR3 gt is the vertical sensitivity in volts Sets or returns the units for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will generate an error Supported units are Hz A A A A V A W A dB A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts
323. oup Syntax Related Commands Arguments Search DPO Models SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHoO1d DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa SOUrce SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce DPO Models CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the search source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt xX gt TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax 2 254 Sets or returns the hold time setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOId HOLDTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOI1d HOLDTime DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive value
324. oup Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the clock source setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk SOUrce SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL ECL SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 253 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Gr
325. pe to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition Read or write is indicated by the R W bit in the I C protocol Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection READ specifies read as the data direction WRITE specifies write as the data direction NOCARE specifies either as the data direction TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the PC data direction TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe Conditions Group 2 276 Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 1I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Trigger
326. pecified zoom on or off where x is the integer 1 representing the single zoom window lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Arguments ON turns Zoom on OFF turns Zoom 1 off lt NR1 gt 0 disables the specified zoom any other value enables the specified zoom Examples ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE ON turns Zoom on 2 354 ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE might return ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 indicating that Zoom is on DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the Ethernet GPIB with the TEK USB 488 Adapter and USB interfaces This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope The oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8 bit registers and two queues for each interface The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers and components They also explain how the event handling system operates Registers Overview The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups Status Registers contain information about the status of the oscilloscope They include the Standard Event Status Register SESR m Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue They include the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Event Status Enable Register ESER and
327. play GRAticule 2 125 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual DISplay INTENSITy 2 126 DISplay PERSistence 2 127 E ESE 2 129 ESR 2 129 Ethernet Command Group 2 19 ETHERnet DNS IPADDress 2 130 ETHERnet ENET ADDress 2 131 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress 2 131 ETHERnet PING STATUS 2 134 ETHERnet DHCPbootp 2 130 ETHERnet DOMAINname 2 131 ETHERnet HTTPPort 2 132 ETHERnet IPADDress 2 132 ETHERnet NAME 2 133 ETHERnet PASS Word 2 133 ETHERnet PING 2 133 ETHERnet SUBNETMask 2 134 EVENT 2 135 EVMsg 2 135 EVQty 2 136 F FACtory 2 136 File System Command Group 2 20 FILESystem FREESpace 2 140 FILESystem WRITEFile 2 142 FILESystem 2 137 FILESystem CWD 2 137 FILESystem DELEte 2 138 FILESystem DIR 2 139 FILESystem FOR Mat 2 139 FILESystem MKDir 2 140 FILESystem READFile 2 141 FILESystem REName 2 141 FILESystem RMDir 2 142 FPAnel PRESS 2 143 FPAnel TURN 2 144 G GPIBUsb ADDress 2 145 GPIBUsb ID 2 145 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Index H Hard copy Command Group 2 21 HARDCopy 2 146 HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter 2 146 HARDCopy PRINTer ADD 2 148 HARDCopy PRINTer DELete 2 148 HARDCopy PRINTer LIST 2 149 HARDCopy PRINTer REName 2 149 HARDCopy INKSaver 2 147 HARDCopy LAYout 2 147 HARDCopy PREVIEW 2 148 HEADer 2 149 Horizontal Command Group 2 22 HORizontal ACQLENGTH 2 150 HORizontal DELay MODe 2 151 HORizontal DELay TIMe 2 151 HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate 2 15
328. ples Returns the type and serial number of the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe ID CH2 PROBE ID might return CH2 PROBE ID TYPE 10X SERNUMBER N A indicating that a passive 10x probe of unknown serial number is attached to channel 2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 95 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the serial number of the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number NOTE For Level 0 and 1 probes the serial number will be Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER might return CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER B010289 indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1 is BO10289 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the type of probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number Level 2 or higher probes supply their exact product nomenclature for Level 0 or 1 probes a generic No Probe Detected message is returned Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE CH1 PROBE ID TYPE might return CH1 PROBE ID TYPE P6203 indicating that P6203 type probe is attached to channel 1 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Query Only Group Syntax 2 96 Returns the resistance factor of the probe attached to chann
329. plicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSor VBArs USE CURrent FIVEdivs CURSor VBArs UNIts DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 107 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments CURrent sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 0 is the current position of the left most V Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the right most V Bar cursor FIVEdivs sets V Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 2 5 divisions from the center vertical graticule Examples CURSOR VBARS USE CURRENT sets the V Bar measurement scale to use the current cursor positions as 0 and 100 of scale if units are set to CURSor VBArs VDELTa Query Only Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks Group Cursor Syntax CURSor VBArs VDELTa Related Commands CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns lt NR3 gt indicates the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors Examples CURSOR VBARS VDELTA might return CURSOR VBARS VDELTA 1 064E 0 indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursors ticks is 1 064 units CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta Query Only Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius AY AX The ratio is calculated as cursor 2 Y cursor 1 Y cursor 2 X cursor 1 X Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt Query
330. ption FACtory Resets the oscilloscope to factory default settings RCL Recalls saved oscilloscope settings RECAII SETUp Recalls saved oscilloscope settings RECAII WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference location SAV Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location SAVe ASSlgn TYPe Sets or returns the assignment of the data to be saved SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt Saves event table data from bus lt x gt to a specified file and location SAVe IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat Sets or returns the file format to use for saving screen images when the file type cannot be determined from the given file name or when screen images are captured by using the front panel SAVe IMAGe LAYout Sets or returns the layout to use for saved screen images SAVe SETUp Saves the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location or file SAVe WAVEform Saves a waveform to one of four reference memory locations or a file SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Sets or returns the format for saved waveforms SAVe WAVEform GATIng Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform or a specified portion of the waveform SETUP lt x gt DATE Returns the date when the specified oscilloscope setup was saved SETUPsx gt LABEL Sets or returns the specified oscilloscope setup label SETUPsx g
331. r in an expression All these operations must end with a right parenthesis AMPlitude AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MEAN MINImum NDUty NOVershoot NWldth PDUTy PERIod PHAse PK2pk POVershoot PWldth RISe RMS Executes the selected measurement operation on the waveform active or reference that follows All these operations must end with a right parenthesis LOG EXP SQRT SINE COSINE TANGENT Executes trigonometric and other functions All these operations must end with a right parenthesis VAR1 VAR2 Adds the user defined variable to the expression Refer to the MATHVAR lt x gt command ree Executes an addition subtraction multiplication or division operation on the following expression and are also unary use to negate the expression that follows DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Table 2 38 Advanced Math expression elements cont Expression Description lt gt lt gt amp amp Executes relational and logical operations Parentheses provide a way to control evaluation order in an expression The comma is used to separate the from and to waveforms in Delay and Phase measurement operations 1 0 E Specifies a numeric value in optional scientific notation MATH1 DEFINE CH1 CH2 a
332. r returns the slope of the edge the oscilloscope uses for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt FALL RISe MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 173 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 lt x gt specifies which waveform to use where lt x gt 1 is the from waveform and lt x gt 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE or FALL MEASUrement IMMed SOurce 1 2 174 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for all single source immediate measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking an immediate delay measurement or phase measurement NOTE If you do not specify a numerical suffix the source is assumed to be SOURCE 1 Measurement MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 1 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the channel number MAT
333. rammer Manual 1 3 Getting Started Documentation The following documents are available for download on the Manuals Finder Web site at www tektronix com DPO 3000 Series User Manual Information about installing and operating the oscilloscope Getting Started with OpenChoice Solutions Manual Options for getting data from your oscilloscope into any one of several available analysis tools DPO 3000 Series Technical Reference Oscilloscope specifications and a performance verification procedure TekVISA Programmer Manual Description of TekVISA the Tektronix implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface API Tek VISA is industry compliant software for writing interoperable oscilloscope drivers in a variety of Application Development Environments ADEs DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax You can control the operations and functions of the oscilloscope through the Ethernet port or the USB 2 0 device port using commands and queries The related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries The topics also describe the conventions that the oscilloscope uses to process them See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group or use the index to locate a specific command Backus Naur Form This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus Naur Notation Form BNF notation Refer to the following table for the symb
334. rement IMMed VALue Returns the value of the immediate measurement MEASUrement INDICators Returns all measurement indicator parameters MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators S TATE Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Returns the number of values accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Returns the delay measurement parameters for the specified measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection Sets or returns the search direction to use for delay measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge to use for delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Returns the maximum value found since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Returns the mean value accumulated s
335. rm This command starts or stops the oscilloscope self test Depending on the argument self test capabilities are either turned on or off Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg STATE EXECute ABORt Arguments EXECute starts diagnostics ABORt stops diagnostics at the end of the current loop Examples DIAG STATE EXECute starts diagnostics DiSplay Query Only Returns the current display settings Group Display Syntax DISplay DiSplay CLOCk Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope displays the date and time The query form of this command returns an ON 1 or an OFF 0 Group Display 2 124 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DiSplay FORMat Group Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay GRAticule Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay CLOCk ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay CLOCk DATE TIME ON enables the display of date and time OFF disables the display of date and time lt NR1 gt 0 disables the display of date and time any other value enables the display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK ON enables display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK might return DISPLAY CLOCK 1 indicating that the display of date and time is currently enabled Sets or returns the display format Display DISplay FORMat YT XY DISplay FORMat YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode XY argument di
336. rn REF4 LABEL Clk wfm 2 REF lt x gt TIMe Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the time that reference waveform data was copied into the internal reference memory for reference channel lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt TIMe REF4 TIME might return 16 54 05 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 212 Sets or returns the vertical position of the reference waveform specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed For example if the position for Reference 3 is set to 2 0 the signal represented by that reference will be displayed at 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Vertical REF lt x gt VERTiCal POSition lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt VERTiCal POSition CH lt x gt POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center horizontal graticule The range is from 5 0 to 5 0 divisions REF2 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Reference 2 input signal 1 3
337. rns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut MATH HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut MATH HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 243 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIcC PATtern INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW Xx SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH lt x gt HIGH specif
338. rns the mid reference level for delay to measurements MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Sets or returns the method for assigning high and low reference levels MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH Sets or returns the top reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Sets or returns the low reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for waveform measurements MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for second waveform measurements MEASUrement SNAPShot Displays the measurement snapshot list MEASUrement STATIstics MODE Turns measurement statistics on or off MEASUrement STATIstics Clears or returns all of the statistics accumulated for all period measurements MEAS1 through MEAS4 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 27 Command Groups Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Controls the responsiveness of the mean and standard deviation to waveform changes MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt Sets or returns the source for the current single channel measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt Sets or returns the source for the specified measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for the specified channel in abs
339. ro Sets or returns the time of the first point in the incoming waveform WFMInpre YMUIt Sets or returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 32 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description WFMInpre Y OFf Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels WFMInpre YUNit Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform WFMInpre YZEro Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform WFMOutpre Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the DATA SOURCE command WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain WFMOutpre BN_Fmt Sets or returns the format of binary data for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre ENCdg Sets or returns the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms WFMOutpre FRACTional This query always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed WFMOutpre NR_Pt Returns the number of points for the waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe query WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Returns the point format for the outgoing waveform
340. robe attached to the front panel Aux In connector Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe RESistance Examples AUXin PRObe RESiStance might return AUXin PROBE RESISTANCE 1 0000E 6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to the front panel Aux In connector is 1 MQ NOTE This query will return 0 0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe does not report the input resistance AUXin PRObe SIGnal This command changes the input bypass setting on VPI probes that support input bypass for example the TCP0001 If sent to a probe that does not support input bypass it is ignored Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS AUXin PRObe STGnal Arguments ByPass sets the probe to Bypass mode PASS sets the probe to Pass mode AUXin PRObe UNIts Query Only Returns a string describing the units of measure of the probe attached to the Aux In input DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 65 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples BUS Conditions Group Syntax Vertical AUXin PRObe UNIts AUXin PROBE UNITS might return AUXin PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the attached probe are volts Sets or returns the parameters for each bus These parameters affect either the Serial Trigger Setup or the Bus Display This command requires a DPO3 AUTO DPO3EMBD or DPO3COMP application module Bus BUS BUS B lt x gt CAN BITR
341. rs CURSor VBArs DELTa Returns the difference between vbar cursors CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the vbar cursor lt x gt horizontal position CURSor VBArs UNIts Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors CURSor VBArs USE Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale CURSor VBArs VDELTa Returns the vertical difference between the CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta two vertical bar cursor ticks Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 17 Command Groups Table 2 17 Cursor Commands cont Command Description CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt Returns the polar radius of the specified cursor CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts Returns the polar radius units CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta Returns the XY cursor polar coordinate delta CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts Returns the cursor polar coordinate units CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X x Y cursor measurement CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts Returns the XY cursor product unit
342. rt lt QString gt is an integer port number enclosed in quotes NOTE Consider the following if you are using the e Scope control software If you dont enter a port address in the URL then the ETHERnet HTTPPort value must be set to 80 which is the default port for HTTP protocol If you use a URL with a port address for example http DPO3104 04WKL4 1234 the port number is specified by the number after the colon Set the ETHERnet HTTPPort value to this same number ETHERNET HTTPPORT 80 sets the HTTP port value to 80 Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet IPADDress lt Qstring gt ETHERnet IPADDress lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples ETHERnet NAME Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet PASSWord Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERNET IPADDRESS 123 121 13 214 sets the oscilloscope s IP address Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet NAME lt QString gt ETHERnet NAME lt QString gt is the network name assigned to the oscilloscope enclosed in quotes ETHERNET NAME labscope1 sets the oscilloscope s network name Sets or returns the HTTP Ethernet access password If a password is set the user must enter the password before the user s Web brows
343. rtion after power on PSC 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false PSC might return to indicate that the power on status clear flag is set to true Sets or returns a string of Protected User Data This data is protected by the PASSWord command You can modify it only by first entering the correct password This password is not necessary to query the data Status and Error PUD lt Block gt lt QString gt PUD PASS Word lt Block gt is a block containing up to 300 ASCII characters lt QString gt is a string containing up to 300 ASCII characters PUD 229This oscilloscope belongs to me stores the string This oscilloscope belongs to me in the user protected data area PUD might return 221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X This command restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Save and Recall RCL lt NR1 gt FACtory LRN RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt is a value in the range from 1 to 10 which specifies a saved setup storage location RCL 3 restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory location 3 RECAII SETUp No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Restores the state of the oscilloscope fro
344. s CURSor XY RATIO DELta Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursor X position and cursor Y position CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt Returns the X or Y position for the specified cursor CURSor XY RATIO UNIts Returns the X and Y cursor units for the ratio measurement CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the cursor X rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts Returns the Cursor X rectangular units CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt gt Sets or returns the cursor Y rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Returns the cursor Y rectangular units Display Command Group 2 18 Use the commands in the Display Command Group to change the graticule style the displayed intensities and to set the characteristics of the waveform display Use these commands to set the style that best displays your waveforms and graticule display properties Note that the mode you choose globally affects all displayed waveforms DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 18 Display Commands Command Groups Command Description DiSplay Returns current display settings DiSplay CLOCk Sets or returns the display of the date time sta
345. s CH lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax CH lt x gt BANdwidth Group Returns the status of the SPC operation This query does not initiate a SPC Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate RESults SPC CAL INIT indicates that SPC has never successfully completed PASS indicates that the last SPC operation passed FAIL indicates that the last SPC operation failed RUNNING indicates that the SPC operation is running CALIBRATE RESULTS SPC returns the results of the last SPC operation either PASS or FAIL Returns the vertical parameters for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt Sets or returns the selectable low pass bandwidth limit filter for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 87 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt COUPling Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 88 CH lt x gt BANdwidth TwEnty Twofi fty FUL1 lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt BANdwi dth TWEnty sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel lt x gt to 20 MHz ONEfi fty sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel lt x gt to 150 MHz FUL disables any optional bandwidth limiting The specified channel operates at its maximum attainable bandwidth lt NR3 gt is a double precision ASCII string The oscilloscope rounds this value to an available bandwidth using geometric rounding and then us
346. s equivalent to viewing the delay measurement settings on the measurement readout Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking an immediate delay measurement NOTE Use the MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 command to specify the delay to waveform Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection BACKWards FORWards MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 BACKWwards starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform FORWards starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last rising or falling edge MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Group Syntax Sets o
347. s a percent relative to HIGH and LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 196 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE This command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the high reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default high reference level is 90 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 95 sets the high reference level to 95 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 90 of HIGH DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE this comman
348. s for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOId SETTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOI1d SETTime lt NR3 gt specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall DELTatime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l DELTatime lt NR3 gt specifies the transition time in seconds SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l POLarity DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 255 Commands Listed in Alphabet
349. s is true during a transition on the clock channel SETHO1d sets the oscilloscope to trigger on setup and hold violations between a data source and a clock source Use one channel input as the clock signal and a second channel input as the data input The clocking and data levels are used to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC sets the trigger A logic class to LOGIc which causes the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true NANd specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is false NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is true TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION might return TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION NAND DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 291 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order which indicates that the oscilloscope will trigger if the AND logic conditions are false TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of chan
350. s may be specified An empty string can be used for blank arguments Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer ADD lt name gt lt server gt lt address gt lt name gt is the name of the network printer queue lt server gt is the host name of the print LPR server lt address gt is the IP address of the print server HARDCopy PRINTer DELete No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 148 Removes a network printer from the list of available printers The printer name is case sensitive Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer DELete lt name gt lt name gt is the name of the printer to be deleted DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Query Only Group Syntax Returns a list of currently attached printers Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer LIST HARDCopy PRINTer REName No Query Form HEADer Group Syntax Arguments Group Renames a network printer on the list of available printers replacing the currently stored settings with the settings specified in this command Four arguments must be present but the arguments may be empty strings if the value for a field is to be deleted Hard Copy HARDCopy PRINTer REName lt name gt lt new_name gt lt new_server gt lt new_address gt lt name gt is the name of the printer to be deleted lt new_name gt is the new name for this printer lt new_server gt is the new print server for this print
351. s or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a waveform data transfer when data points require than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutpre BYT_Nr is 2 Changing WFMOutpre BYT_Or also changes DATa ENCdg if DATa ENCdg is not ASCIi Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre BYT_Or LSB MSB wFMOutpre BYT_Or DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 343 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT_Nr LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform data to be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR LSB indicating that the least significant data byte will be transmitted first Sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre ENCdg ASCii BINary wFMOutpre ENCdg DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BYT_Or WFMOutpre BIT_Nr WFMOutpre BN_ Fmt ASCH i specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format Waveforms will be sent as lt NR1 gt numbers BINary specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose further specification is determined by WFMOu
352. s the point format for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Returned values are either ENV which indicates envelope mode format in which the data is returned as a series of min max pairs or Y which indicates normal waveform points The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 345 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Examples wFMOutpre PT_Fmt CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT_FMT might return WwFMOutpre PT_Fmt ENV indicating that the waveform data is a series of min max pairs WFMOutpre PT_Off Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed If the waveform is not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_OfFf DATa SOUrce Arguments are ignored WFMOUTPRE PT_OFF might return WFMOUTPRE PT_OFF 0 indicating that the waveform specified by DATA SOURCE is on or displayed WFMOutpre PT_ORder Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples 2 346 This query is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes and always r
353. s to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source The clock can be selected as NONE A selection of None implies pattern trigger Any other selection implies state trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 NONE TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the analog input channel source NONE specifies a Pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the conditions used for generating an A logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern and identifies the time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CHL HIGH CH2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 293 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LOW CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSTHAN WHEN LESSLIMIT 16 0000E 9 LIMIT 16 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 16 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value The time value is used as part of the pattern trigger condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern meets the specified time constraints Trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern
354. sage box You can send a tab by transmitting a tab character t or x09 followed characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by significant eight bits of a 16 bit number The number specifies the position relative to the left margin of the message area For example to tab send TAB t or x09 NUL decimal 0 and CR decimal 13 For example using hexadecimal escape sequences MESSAGE SHOW x09 x01 x17Hello when sent as a command would cause the Hello to be displayed starting at pixel position 279 relative to the left margin set by the MESSAGE BOX command If you want to display characters starting at position 279 then 279 0x0117 split the hexadecimal number into two characters 0x01 and 0x17 and send x09 x01 x17 Special characters which control decoration are two character sequences where the first character is an escape Ox1b and the second character is as described below Bit 7 0 Bit 6 If set inverse video is toggled from current state and the following text is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again Remaining bits are ignored Bit 5 If set the color index in the four LSB s bits 0 through 3 is applied to the foreground or background color depending on the fg bg bit bit 4 Bit 4 If set color change is applied to the background otherwise applies to the foreground Bit 0 3 Specifies the color index 0 through 15 to
355. saves the file in Portable Network Graphics format BMP saves the file in Microsoft Windows bitmap format TIFF saves the file in Tagged Image File Format Sets or returns the layout to use for saved screen images Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe LAYout LANdsScape PORTRait SAVe IMAGe LAYout LANdscape specifies that screen images are saved in landscape format PORTRait specifies that screen images are saved in portrait format SAVe SETUp No Query Form Group Syntax Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location You can later use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state Save and Recall SAVe SETUp lt file path gt lt NR1 gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 217 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples RCL RECAI SETUp SAV lt file path gt is the target location for storing the setup file lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and one or lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will store the file in the current working directory lt filename gt stands for a filename Use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended For setups use the extension SET lt NR1 gt specifies a locat
356. scope and its firmware IDN Returns the same information as the ID command except the data is formatted according to Tektronix Codes amp Formats LANGuage Sets or returns the user interface display language LOCk Sets or returns the front panel lock state LRN Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings MESSage Sets or queries message parameters NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data PASSWord Enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands REM Specifies a comment which is ignored by the oscilloscope SET Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories TIME Sets or returns the time displayed by the oscilloscope TOTaluptime Returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been turned on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed TRG Performs the group execute trigger GET TST Tests the interface and returns the status UNLock Unlocks front panel VERBose Sets or returns the verbose state Save and Recall Command Group Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings When you save a setup you save all the settings of the oscilloscope When you recall a setup the oscilloscope restores itself to the state it was in when you originally saved the setting DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 29 Command Groups 2 30 Table 2 27 Save and Recall Commands Command Descri
357. shold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in Runt and Slew Rate triggers as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger A LOwerthreshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the lower limit threshold for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the lower limit threshold for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary Input Used for the following trigger types Runt Slew Rate Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOwerthreshold EXT AUX ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 297 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the A trigger mode Trigger TRIGger A MODe AUTO NORMal
358. splays one waveform against another Selecting one source causes its corresponding source to be implicitly selected producing a single trace from the two input waveforms DISPLAY FORMAT XY sets the display format to XY DISPLAY FORMAT might return DISPLAY FORMAT YT indicating the display format is YT Selects or queries the type of graticule the oscilloscope displays Display DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 125 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples DiSplay INTENSITy Group Syntax Examples DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair FRAme FUL GRId DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs FRAme specifies a frame only FUL specifies a frame a grid and cross hairs GRId specifies a frame and grid only DISPLAY GRATICULE FRAme sets the graticule type to display the frame only DISPLAY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL indicating that all graticule elements are selected Query Only Returns the display intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy DISPLAY INTENSITY might return DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH DiSplay INTENSITy BACKLight Group Syntax Examples 2 126 Sets and returns the waveform backlight intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight LOW MEDium HIGH DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT might return DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH
359. ss ETHERnet HTTPPort Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 19 Command Groups Table 2 19 Ethernet Commands cont Command Description ETHERnet IPADDress Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet NAME Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet PASSWord Sets or returns the Ethernet access password ETHERnet PING Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATUS Returns the results from pinging the gateway IP address ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value File System Command Group Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use USB media You can use the commands to do the following m List the contents of a directory Create and delete directories Create read rename or delete a file Format media When using these commands keep the following points in mind m File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes E MYDIR TEK00001 SET m File names follow the non case sensitive MSDOS format DRIVE PATH filename Path separators may be either forward slashes or back slashes NOTE Using back slash as a path separator may produce some unexpected results depending on how your application treats escaped characters Many applications recognize the sequence of back slash fo
360. st positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NEDGECount is the count of negative edges NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude x 100 NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Du
361. synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll or service request handler Serial Poll Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands When the operation is complete the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR will be enabled and the Event Status Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register will be enabled The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization with serial polling looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE O Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC while serial poll 0 keep looping Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Service Request Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in t
362. t CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts Query Only Returns the XY cursor product units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts CURSor XY RATIO DELta Query Only Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position AY AX The ratio is calculated as Y2 Y1 X2 X1 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RATIO DELta 2 110 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the X horizontal or Y vertical position for the specified cursor which can be 1 X or 2 Y The ratio is calculated as Position 1 Y1 X1 Position 2 Y2 X2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY RATIO UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor X and cursor Y units for the ratio measurement Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY RATIO UNItS CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta Query Only Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta CURSor XY REC Tangular X POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the X rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2 Cursors are specified by x and can be either 1 or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt is the coordinate in volts DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 111 Commands Listed in Alph
363. t TIME Returns the time when the specified oscilloscope setup was saved DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Search Command Group Command Groups Use the commands in the Search Commands Group to seek out information in waveform records Search Commands Command Description SEARCH Returns all search related settings SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy Copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to the search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Sets the search state to on or off SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL Returns the total number of matches for search lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A BUS Returns the serial search type SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the search condition for CAN B lt x gt CAN CONDition search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the CAN search condition to B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe in bytes to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCHsx gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the binary data string to be B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH lt sx gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used
364. t is the threshold level in volts Sets or returns the state of B trigger activity If the B trigger state is on the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence If the B trigger state is off then only the A trigger causes the trigger event Trigger TRIGger B STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt TRIGger B STATE TRIGger A MODe ON specifies that the B trigger is active and in causes trigger events conjunction with the A trigger OFF specifies that only the A trigger causes trigger events lt NR1 gt a 0 turns off the B trigger any other value activates the B trigger TRIGGER B STATE ON sets the B trigger to active making it capable of causing trigger events TRIGGER B STATE might return TRIGGER B STATE Oindicating that the B trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger events DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger B TIMe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B TYPe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns B trigger delay time The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger B BY is set to TIMe Trigger TRIGger B TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger B TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt lt NR3 gt is the B trigger delay time in seconds TRIGGER B TIME 4E 6 sets the B trigger delay time to 4 us TRIGGER B TIME might return TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 in
365. t is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 1 71 sets the mid reference level to 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 0 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 2 194 Group Syntax Sets or returns the mid reference level for the to waveform when taking a delay measurement and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of delay measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5 sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0 5 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5000E 00 indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0 5 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel lt x gt where x is the measur
366. t meet the NTSC 625 50 2 1 standard a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz SECAM sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the SECAM standard CUSTom sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video horizontal scan rate parameters defined by TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN command DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 319 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples HDtv sets the oscilloscope to trigger on HDTV video signals that meet standards defined by the TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat command TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD NTSC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on NTSC standard video signals TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD might return TRIGger A VIDeo STANDARD HDTV indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on an HDTV format TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD TRIGger B 2 320 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Group Sets or returns the video field or line that the trigger detects Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD EVEN ALLFields ALLLines NUMERic TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video odd fields EVEN argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video even fields ALLFields argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all fields ALLLines argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all video lines NUMERic argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the video signal line specified b
367. t x gt lt NR3 gt CURSoOr VBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor VBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position A floating point value with an exponent CURSor VBArs POSITION2 9 00E 6 positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor at 9 ms DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual CURSor VBArs UNIts Group Syntax Arguments Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor VBArs POSITION1 this command might return CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 0000E 06 indicating that the cursor vertical bar is positioned at 1 ps Sets or returns the units for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSor VBArs UNIts SEConds HERtz DEGrees PERcent CURSor VBArs UNIts SEConds sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain seconds HERtzZ sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain Hertz DEGrees sets the units to degrees for use with an XY display PERcent sets the units to percent for use with ratio cursors SECONDS HERTZ DEGREES or PERCENT depending on the current vertical bar cursor units CURSOR VBARS UNITS HERtz sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1 seconds CURSOR VBARS UNITS might return CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to seconds CURSor VBArs USE No Query Form Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale This command is only ap
368. t x gt HORizontal DELay TiMe Sets or returns the horizontal delay time for reference waveform lt x gt where x is the reference channel number The delay time is expressed in seconds and is limited to 5 times the reference horizontal scale Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe Arguments lt NR3 gt is the delay time in seconds Examples REF2 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 4 0E 6 sets the horizontal delay time for the REF2 waveform to 4 us REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale for reference waveform lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the horizontal scale in seconds Examples REFL HORIZONTAL SCALE might return REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 0E 4 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 211 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the reference waveform label for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt REF lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alpha numeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the label text for the reference channel lt x gt waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters REF4 LABEL might retu
369. t x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt is the data string in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if search the condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOST OUT VALue lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions Group 2 238 Sets or returns the length of the data string for an SPI trigger search if the search condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO3EMBD application module Search DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns a bus serial search lt x gt
370. t x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQua argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum width in seconds SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE 2 252 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOId CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk EDGE FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Gr
371. ta qualifier DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or returns the CAN trigger frame type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for the CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the binary data string Sets or returns the error type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or
372. tatus and Error DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 129 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Examples ETHERnet DHCPbootp Group Syntax Arguments Examples ESR ALLEv CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMsg SRE STB ESR might return 213 showing that the SESR contains the binary value 11010101 Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server Ethernet ETHERnet DHCPbootp ON OFF ETHERnet DHCPbootp ON enables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server in order to automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope NOTE Do not use DHCP BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been assigned a static address on a network If you set this command to ON the DHCP BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information OFF disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server ETHERNET DHCPBOOTP ON sets the oscilloscope to search for a DHCP or BOOTP server and assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Group Syntax 2 130 Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server Dns IP address Ethernet ETHERnet DNS IPADDress lt QString gt ETHERnet DNS IPADDress DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET DNS I
373. tax Arguments Examples lt NR3 gt is the gain in user units per division REF4 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per division REF4 VERTICAL SCALE might return REF2 VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000e 00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1 V per division Embeds a comment within programs as a means of internally documenting the programs The oscilloscope ignores these embedded comment lines Miscellaneous REM lt QString gt lt QString gt is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters REM This is a comment is a comment string that the oscilloscope will ignore Resets the oscilloscope to the factory default settings The RST command does not alter the following Calibration data that affect device specifications m The Output Queue m The Service Request Enable Register setting The Power on status clear flag setting Alias definitions Stored settings m The PUD Response m Any of the values associated with the DATA command m Oscilloscope password DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples SAV No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples SAVe ASSlgn TYPe Group Syntax DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Status and Error RST FACtory RECAII SETUp SAVe SETUp PSC RCL SAV None RST r
374. ted waveform Vertical SELect CH lt x gt 0ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect CH lt x gt ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 259 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SELect CONTROI Group Syntax Arguments Returns Examples SELect MATH 1 2 260 Group SELECT CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects channel 2 SELECT CHL might return SELECT CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being displayed Sets or returns the waveform that is the recipient of future channel related commands for example the cursor commands The command form also performs the equivalent of a SELect CH lt x gt ON command as well as the Math Reference and Bus variations of that command Vertical SELect CONTRO CH lt x gt MATH BUS lt x gt SELect CONTRO1 CH lt x gt specifies a channel waveform as the waveform affected by the front panel controls lt x gt is the channel number MATH specifies the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the front panel controls BUS lt x gt specifies a bus waveform as the waveform affected by the front panel controls lt x gt specifies the bus number NONE if all
375. ted in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt TERmination 2 98 Group Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms but affects channel waveforms differently from other waveforms For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified E For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware Vertical CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt SCAle CH lt x gt OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt is the vertical channel scale in units per division The value entered here is truncated to three significant digits CH4 SCALE 100E 03 sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division CH2 SCALE might return CH2 SCALE 1 0000 indicating that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division Sets the connected disconnected status of a 50 Q resistor which may be connected between the specified channel s coupled input and oscill
376. termine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all reference waveform searches that uses an upper threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V Sets or returns the selected waveform display controlled by the front panel on or off Vertical SELect ON OFF DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples SELect BUS lt x gt Group Syntax SELect CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ON turns the selected waveform display on OFF turns the selected waveform display off SELECT might return the following SELECT BUS1 0 BUS2 0 CH1 1 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 0O MATH 0 REF1 O REF2 O REF3 0 REF4 O CONTROL CH1 This command turns on and off the display of the waveform for lt x gt where x is the bus number The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect BUS lt x gt lt NR1 gt OFF ON SELect BUS lt x gt Turns the display of the channel lt x gt waveform on or off where lt x gt is the channel number This command also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selec
377. the Service Request Enable Register SRER Status Registers The Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these registers Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event such as an execution error or message available When an event of a given type occurs the oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero See Enable Registers Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred The Standard Event Status Register SESR The SESR records eight types of events that can occur within the oscilloscope Use the ESR query to read the SESR register Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new events NOTE TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events including some front panel actions 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Figure 3 1 The Standard Event Status Register SESR DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 3 1 Status and Events 3 2 Table 3 1 SESR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB PON Power On Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on On completion the diagnostic self tests a
378. the area below ground is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models BURSt measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 10 This measurement is available only on DPO models FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the recipr
379. the channels are turned off NONE is ignored on input SELECT CONTROL CH2 resets acquisition displays on channel 2 and causes the selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands SELECT CONTROL might return SELECT CONTROL MATH indicating that math is the implied object of waveform commands Turns on and off the display of the math waveform The query returns whether the math waveform is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples SELect REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SELect MATH 1 ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect MATH 1 ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT MATH ON turns the math waveform display on and selects it SELECT MATH might return SELECT MATH 1 indicating that the math waveform is being displayed Turns on and off the display of the reference waveform lt x gt The lt x gt variable represents the reference channel number The query returns whether the channel is on or off Vertical SELect REF lt x gt ON OFF lt NR1 gt SELect REF lt x gt ON turns on the display of
380. the oscilloscope may take longer to update Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALUe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts ESR ALLEv Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALue 2 8740E 06 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item is added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement METHod Sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0 and 100 reference level Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement METHod Auto HIStogram MINMax Related Commands MEASUrement METHod MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 191 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples Auto selects the best method for each data set HIStogram sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram algorithm MINMax uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This selection is best for examining waveforms with no large flat portions of a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves MEASUREMENT METHOD might return MEASUREMENT METHOD MINMAX indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX MEASUrement REFLevel Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current reference level parameters Measurement
381. the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT REF2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects reference waveform 2 SELECT REF2 might return SELECT REF2 1 indicating that reference waveform 2 is being displayed DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 261 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SET Query Only 2 262 Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration information for the calibration values the WFMInpre query and the WFMOutpre query This query allows you to record or learn the current oscilloscope settings You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the SET query The SET query always returns command headers regardless of the setting of the HEADer command This is because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to the oscilloscope as a command string The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length This command is identical to the LRN command Miscellaneous SET HEADer LRN VERBose SET returns a long response part of which could be as follows SET ACQUIRE STOPA
382. thod to probe CAN bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe CANH CANL RX TX DIFFerential BUS B lt X gt CAN PRObe CANH specifies the single ended CANH signal as specified by the CAN standard CANL specifies the single ended CANL signal as specified by the CAN standard RX specifies the receive signal on the bus side of the CAN transceiver TX specifies the transmit signal DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 67 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DIFFerential specifies the differential CAN signal BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the sampling point during each bit period for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt BUS B lt X gt CAN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt is the sample point in percent Values are limited to 25 30 70 75 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN bus data source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce CH1 CH4 is the analog channel to use as the data source BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt Conditions 2 68 Sets or returns
383. tics are being displayed for each measurement MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 200 Sets or returns the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations Measurement MEASUrement STATIStics WEIghting lt NR1 gt MEASUrement STATIStics WEIghting MEASUrement STATIstics MODE lt NR1 gt is the number of samples used for the mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 sets statistical weighting to four samples MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 indicating that measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4 samples DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MESSage This command sets or queries message parameters Group Miscellaneous Syntax MESSage MESSage Examples MESSAGE might return MESSAGE SHOW TP401 BOX 271 82 292 114 STATE 0 indicating the message parameters MESSage BOX Sets or returns the size and position of the message window This command does not display the message unless MESSage STATE is on X1 and Y1 are the screen coordinates of the top left corner of the message box X2 and Y2 are the screen coordinates of the bottom right corner of the message box All four coordinates are returned by the query Changing the text in the message box using the MESSAGE SHOW comm
384. til all in process OPC operations are complete If the input buffer becomes full the controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer This can cause a time out Using the BUSY Query The BUSY query allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single sequence acquisition The same command sequence using the BUSY query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement while BUSY keep looping DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 3 9 Status and Events Using the OPC Command Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the WAI command The BUSY query helps you avoid time outs caused by writing too many commands to the input buffer The controller is still tied up though and the repeated BUSY query will result in bus traffic If the corresponding status registers are enabled the OPC command sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when an operation is complete You achieve
385. ting that outgoing waveforms use 8 bits per waveform point Sets or returns the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing the value of WFMOutpre BN_Fmt also changes the value of DATa ENCdg Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre BN_Fmt RI RP wWFMOutpre BN_Fmt DATa ENCdg DATa SOUrce RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BYT_Or Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT RP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in positive integer format WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT might return WFMOUTPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing WFMOutpre BYT_Nr also changes WFMOutpre BIT_Nr and Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BYT_Nr lt NR1 gt wFMOutpre BYT_Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BIT_Nr lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2 WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT_NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point Set
386. tings conflict 222 224 Data out of range Illegal parameter value DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 241 Hardware missing 250 Mass storage error 251 Missing mass storage 252 Missing media 253 Corrupt media 254 Media full 255 Directory full 256 File name not found 257 File name error 258 Media protected 259 File name too long 270 Hardcopy error 271 Hardcopy device not responding 272 Hardcopy is busy 273 Hardcopy aborted 274 Hardcopy configuration error 280 Program error 282 Insufficient network printer information 283 Network printer not responding 284 Network printer server not responding 286 Program runtime error 287 Print server not found 2200 Measurement error Measurement system error 2201 Measurement error Zero period 2202 Measurement error No period second waveform 2203 Measurement error No period second waveform 2204 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2205 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2206 Measurement error Invalid gate 2207 Measurement error Measurement overflow 2208 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2209 Measurement error No second Mid Ref crossing 2210 Measurement error No Mid Ref crossing second waveform 2211 Measurement error N
387. tion is IDentifier This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition READ specifies the read condition WRITE specifies the write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for a search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA This command requires a DPO3AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual EQual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALi fier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue LESSThan searches for bus data less than the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Than searches for bus data greater than the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A B
388. tion triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all channel searches that uses an upper threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 257 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all math waveform searches that uses an upper threshold lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments SELect Group Syntax 2 258 Sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold to de
389. tly interpreted as signed integers Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform Changing the value of WFMInpre BYT_Nr also changes the value of WFMInpre BIT_Nr Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT_Nr lt NR1 gt WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMiInpre BIT_Nr 2 333 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT_Or Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre ENCdg Group Syntax 2 334 lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2 WFMINPRE BYT_NR 1 sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMINPRE BYT_NR might return WFMINPRE BYT_NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is expected first for incoming waveform data when data points require than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMInpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre BYT_Nr is 2 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT_Or LSB MSB WFMInpre BYT_Or WFMInpre ENCdg WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BYT_Or LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be expected first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be expected first WFMINPRE BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming waveform data to be expected first WFMINPRE BYT_OR might return WFMINPRE BYT_OR LSB indicating that the least significant incomin
390. to occur EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to negative TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 SoUrce CH1 CH4 specifies one of the input channels TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the transition trigger TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the specified delta time Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQual TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is faster than the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime SLOwer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is
391. tors INDIvidual INDependent INFInite INIT INKSaver INPut INTENSITy INTERLAced INTERNa l INVERTed INVert INVerted INrange IO IPADDress ISCLOCKed ITALian JAPAnese KOREan LABEL LABe 1 LANGuage LANdscape LARge LAYout LESSEQual LESSLimit LESSThan LESSthan LEVel LF LFRej LIN LINE LINEAr LINEPeriod LIST LOCk LOG LOGIC LOGIC LOG C LOOP LOW LOWLimit LOwerthreshold LSB MAG MAIN MAIn MARK MARKSINCOLumn MATH MATH1 MATHVAR MAXBytedelim MAXSamplerate MAXimum MEAN MEAS MEASUrement MEDium MEG MESSage METHod MID MID2 MINImum MINMax MISO MISOMOST MIXed MKDir MODE MODe MOREEQual MORELimit MOREThan MOREthan MOSI MSB NAME NAMe NANd NEGative NEWpass NEXT NEXt NO NOCARE NOTSErej NONE NONe NOPARI ty NOR NORMa 1 NOTCOMPuted NR1 NR_Pt NTIMES NTIMes NTSC NULL NULLFRDynamic NULLFRStatic NUL NUMACq NUMAVg DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual NUMENTries NUMERIC NUMEnv NUMHORZ NUMVERT OCCURS ODD OFF OFFSet ON ONCE ONFAIL OPTion OR OUT OUTrange OVERLoad OwNer PACKET PAL PARity PASS PASSWord PATtern PAYLength PAYLoad PEAKdetect PERCent PERIod PERSistence PERcent PHASe PING PK2Pk PNG POLARI ty POLar POLarity PORTRait PORTUguese POSITION POSition POSitive POVershoot POWerupstatus PPULSECount PRESS PREVIEW PREViewstate PREVious PRINTer PRODDELta PRODUCT PROGressive PRObe PT_Fmt PT_ORder P
392. tpre BYT_Nr WFMOutpre BIT_Nr WFMOutpre BN_Fmt and WFMOutpre BYT_Or WFMOUTPRE ENCDG might return WFMOUTPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format WFMOUTPRE ENCDG ASC specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent in ASCII format WFMOutpre FRACTional Query Only 2 344 The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed If the waveform DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments WFMOutpre NR_Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre FRACTional DATa SOUrce Arguments are ignored Query Only Returns the number of points for the DATa SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe query The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wWFMOutpre NR_Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR_ Pt WFMOUTPRE NR_PT might return WFMOUTPRE NR_PT 10000 indicating that there are 10000 data points to be sent WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Query Only Group Return
393. ts is specified by TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event The time period is specified by TRIGger B TIMe TRIGGER B BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger event TRIGGER B BY might return TRIGGER B BY EVENTS indicating that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 321 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B EDGE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the source slope and coupling for B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TRIGGER B EDGE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGger B EDGE COUPling Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the type of coupling for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE DC selects DC trigger coupling HFRej selects high frequency reject coupling LFRej selects low frequency reject coupling NOISErej selects DC low sensitivity TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING DC selects DC for the B trigger coupling TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING ATRIGGER for the B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe 2 322 Sets or returns
394. ty Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the number of event codes in the Event Queue This is useful when using the ALLEv query which returns the exact number of events Status and Error EVQty ALLEv EVENT EVMsg EVQTY might return EVQTY 3 indicating the number of event codes in the Event Queue FACtory No Query Form 2 136 Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings This command does the following m Clears the Event Status Enable Register m Clears the Service Request Enable Register m Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255 m Purges all defined aliases Enables all Command Headers m Sets the macro defined by DDT to a zero length field Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations This command does not reset the following Communication settings m Selected GPIB address Sate of the VXI 11 Ethernet IEEE Std 488 2 interface Calibration data that affects device specifications Protected user data Stored settings Power On Status Clear Flag Oscilloscope password DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Save and Recall FACtory PSC RCL RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp None FACTORY resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings FILESystem Query Only Group Syntax Related Comman
395. ty Cycle Positive Width Period x 100 PEDGECount is the count of positive edges DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 189 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples PERTIod is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHASe measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle PK2Pk peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x 100 PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses PwIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 10 to a high reference val
396. ue default is 90 This measurement is available only on DPO models RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the frequency of a waveform MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE RMS indicating that measurement is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Query Only 2 190 Group Syntax Related Commands Returns the units associated with the specified measurement The measurement slots are specified by lt x gt which ranges from through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNItS MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNITS might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNIts indicating units for measurement are set to percent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns a calculate value for the measurement specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 NOTE This is the same value as displayed on screen If measurement statistics are enabled a new value is calculated with every waveform In addition this value is updated approximately every 1 3 second If you are acquiring a long acquisition record
397. uest control 410 Query INTERRUPTED QYE bit 2 set 420 Query UNTERMINATED QYE bit 2 set 430 Query DEADLOCKED QYE bit 2 set 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response QYE bit 2 set 468 Knob Keypad value changed 472 Application variable changed The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution They also notify you of a possible unexpected results DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 8 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 528 Parameter out of range 532 Curve data too long Curve truncated 533 Curve error Preamble values are inconsistent 540 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid in minmax 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 Measurement warning Clipping positive 549 Measurement warning Clipping negative Table 3 9 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 540 Measurement warning 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurem
398. ur when the transitioning signal is slower than the set volts second rate EQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set volts second rate within a 5 tolerance DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order UNEQua l sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to the set volts second rate 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe EDGe SETHOld PULSEWidth RUNt TRAnsition LOGIc BUS with the appropriate application module installed SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first The thresholds are set with the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt commands PULSEWIdth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn MORELimit The polarity is selected using the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity command TRAnsi
399. ve TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity POSi tive argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a positive video sync pulse NEGative argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video sync pulse DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video pulse TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY might return TRIGger A VIDeo POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on a positive video sync pulse TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the A video trigger Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the input channel to use as the A video trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE CH1 sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE might return TRIGger A VIDeo SOURCE CH2 indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the standard for the video trigger Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard NTSc PAL SECAM CUSTom HDtv TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard NTSc sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 525 60 2 1 standard a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz PAL sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals tha
400. vices to communicate using IEEE488 style messages This lets you run your GPIB software applications on USB hardware p A w Before setting up the oscilloscope for remote communication using the electronic physical GPIB interface you should familiarize yourself with the following GPIB requirements m A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the bus No two devices can share the same device address No than 15 devices can be connected to any one line One device should be connected for every 6 feet 2 meters of cable used No than 65 feet 20 meters of cable should be used to connect devices to a bus At least two thirds of the devices on the network should be powered on while using the network Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration Do not use loop or parallel configurations To function correctly your oscilloscope must have a unique device address The default setting for the GPIB configuration is GPIB Address 1 To change the GPIB address settings do the following 1 On the front panel push Utility 2 Push Utility Page 3 Select I O with the Multipurpose knob 4 Push GPIB 5 Enter the GPIB address on the side bezel menu using the multipurpose knob This will set the GPIB address on an attached TEK USB 488 Adapter The oscilloscope is now set up for bidirectional communication with your controller DPO3000 Series Prog
401. video standard TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD Sets or returns the video field trigger TRIGger B Sets the B trigger level to 50 or returns the B trigger parameters TRIGger B BY Sets or returns B trigger time or event qualifiers DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 29 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger B EDGE TRIGger B EDGE COUPling Returns B trigger edge type parameters Sets or returns the type of B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the B edge trigger slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the B edge trigger source TRIGger B EVENTS Returns the current B trigger events parameter TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B LEVel Sets or returns the level for the B trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the level for the B trigger for a specific channel Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger B STATE Returns the current state of the B trigger TRIGger B TIMe Sets or returns the B trigger delay time TRIGger B TYPe Sets or returns the type of B trigger TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger EXTernal Returns external trigger parameters
402. while PNG is compressed HARDCOPY initiates a screen copy to the active printer HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter Group Syntax Arguments 2 146 Sets or returns the currently active printer When a hard copy operation is performed the output will be sent to this printer One of two methods of specifying the printer can be used specifying an index value obtained from looking at the list of attached printers or by specifying the printer name Hard Copy HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter lt NR1 gt lt name gt HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter lt NR1 gt is the index of the desired printer as returned from HARDCopy PRINTer LIST lt name gt is the name of the printer as specified in the printer list This name is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown in the list DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual HARDCopy INKSaver Group Syntax Arguments Examples HARDCopy LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Changes hard copy output to print traces and graticule on a white background while retaining waveform color information except for channel 1 which prints as dark blue because yellow does not show up well and is difficult to see on a white background This option can significantly reduce print time and quantities of ink required compared with WYSIWYG dark background images Hard Copy HARDCopy INKSaver ON or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the ink saver mode on OFF or lt NR1 gt
403. width is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 10 to a high reference value default is 90 This measurement is available only on DPO models RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPe RMS indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Query Only 2 178 Returns the units of the immediate measurement VOLTS VOLTS SQUARED SEC HERTZ PERCENT DIVS SAMPLES OHMS AMPS WATTS MINUTES DEGREES UNKNOWN AMPS SQUARED HOURS DAYS DB BYTES INVERSE HERTZ IRE V OVER V V OVER A VOLTS WATTS V OVER W VOLTS DB V OVER DB A OVER V A OVER A AMPS WATTS A OVER W AMPS DB A OVER DB WATTS VOLTS W OVER V WATTS AMPS W OVER A WATTS SQUARED W OVER W WATTS DB W OVER DB DB VOLTS DB OVER V DB AMPS DB DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Examples C
404. write bit is included in the address BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce BUS B lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the 12C SDATA source Sets or returns the waveform label for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat Sets or returns the LIN ID format BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity Sets or returns the LIN polarity BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce Sets or returns the LIN data source BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard Sets or returns the LIN standard BUS B lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the position of the specified bus waveform BUS B lt x gt RS232C BlTRate Sets or returns the RS232 bit rate for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits Sets or returns the number of bits for the data frame BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter Sets or returns the RS232 delimiting value for a packet on the specified bus DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 13 Command Groups 2 14 Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Commands Description BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode Sets or returns the display mode for the specified bus display and event table BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity Sets or returns parity for RS232 data BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity
405. y controlling your oscilloscope With this information you can write computer programs to perform functions such as setting the front panel controls taking measurements performing statistical calculations and exporting data for use in other programs Setting Up Remote Communications You can remotely communicate between your oscilloscope and PC via the Ethernet USB and GPIB using the TEK USB 488 Adapter Ethernet Ifyou are using Ethernet start by connecting an appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port RJ 45 connector on the rear panel of your oscilloscope This connects the oscilloscope to a 10 100 Base T local area network 2410 076 To change the Ethernet settings on your oscilloscope do the following 1 On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob Push Ethernet Network Settings Be a On the side bezel menu if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network and using a through cable set DHCP BOOTP to On 6 Ifyou are using a cross over cable set DHCP BOOTP to Off and set a hard coded TCPIP address USB Ifyou are using USB start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2 0 high speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 1 1 Getting Started 1 2 GPIB 2410 086 With USB the system automatically configures itself To verify that the USB is enabled 1 On the front panel push Utility 2 Push Uti
406. y the TRIGger A VIDeo LINE command TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD EVEN sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger on even fields TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD might return TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields Sets the B trigger level to 50 of minimum and maximum The query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters This command is similar to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups Trigger DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B BY Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B SETLevel TRIGger B TRIGger A SETLeve sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B SETLEVEL sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B might return the following B trigger parameters TRIGGER B STATE O TYPE EDGE LEVEL 220 0000E 3 BY TIME EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 EVENTS COUNT 2 Selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger Trigger TRIGger B BY EVENTS TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger B TIMe EVENTS sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs The number of even
407. yntax Examples CURSor FUNCtion Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns all of the current cursor settings Cursor CURSor CURSOR might return the following as the current cursor settings CURSOR FUNCTION SCREEN HBARS POSITION1 0 0000 POSITION2 0 0000 UNITS BASE CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT VBARS POSITIONL 19 0006E 6 POSITION2 18 9994E 6 UNITS SECONDS Sets or returns the cursor type Cursors are attached to the selected waveform in Waveform mode and are attached to the display area in Screen mode Cursor CURSor FUNCtion OFF SCREEN WAVEform CURSor FUNCtion OFF removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor type SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors which measure the selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area WAVEform specifies paired cursors in YT display format for measuring waveform amplitude and time In XY and XYZ format these cursors indicate the amplitude positions of an XY pair Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis relative to the trigger CURSOR FUNCTION WAVEFORM selects the paired cursors for measuring waveform amplitude and time CURSOR FUNCTION might return CURSor FUNCtion SCREEN indicating that the screen cursors are currently selected DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual 2 101 Commands List
408. you to the base of the command tree DPO3000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Queries Queries cause the oscilloscope to return status or setting information Queries have the structure E lt Header gt E lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Coma gt lt Argument gt You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level Headers Use the HEADer command to control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of the query response If header is on the query response returns command headers then formats itself as a valid set command When header is off the response includes only the values This may make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response The table below shows the difference in responses Table 2 3 Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses Query Header Off Header On TIME 14 30 00 TIME 14 30 00 ACQuire NUMAVg 100 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 100 Command Parts Header Comma T SAVe WAVEform CH1 REF3 Mnemonics Space Arguments Clearing the oscilloscope You can clear the Output Queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or query by using the selected Device Clear DCL function Command Entry The following rules apply when entering commands You can enter commands in upper or lower case m
409. zation Methods Overview Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received by the oscilloscope some commands start a process that requires time For example once a single sequence acquisition command is executed depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings it may take a few seconds before the acquisition is complete Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process the oscilloscope will continue processing other commands This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation A first operation must complete before the next one is processed The oscilloscope status and event reporting system is designed to accommodate this process The Operation Complete OPC bit of the Standard Event Status Register SESR can be programmed to indicate when certain oscilloscope operations have completed and by setting the Event Status Enable Register ESER to report OPC in the Event Status Bit ESB of the Status Byte Register SBR and setting the Service Request Enable Register SRER to generate service request upon a positive transition of the ESB a service request SRQ interrupt can be generated when certain operations complete as described in this section The following oscilloscope operations can generate an OPC m ACQuire STATE lt non zero nr1 gt ON only when in single sequenc

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

TRIGger:A:BUS:B trigger a bsod

TRIGger:A:BUS:B

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents